Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation And Configuration

Transcript

Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Corporate Headquarters Cisco Systems, Inc. 170 West Tasman Drive San Jose, CA 95134-1706 USA http://www.cisco.com Tel: 408 526-4000 800 553-NETS (6387) Fax: 408 526-4100 Customer Order Number: DOC-12012GSR-ICG= Text Part Number: 78-4331-04 THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. ALL STATEMENTS, INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS. THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION PACKET THAT SHIPPED WITH THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE OR LIMITED WARRANTY, CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY. The following information is for FCC compliance of Class A devices: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case users will be required to correct the interference at their own expense. The following information is for FCC compliance of Class B devices: The equipment described in this manual generates and may radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not installed in accordance with Cisco’s installation instructions, it may cause interference with radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in part 15 of the FCC rules. These specifications are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. You can determine whether your equipment is causing interference by turning it off. If the interference stops, it was probably caused by the Cisco equipment or one of its peripheral devices. If the equipment causes interference to radio or television reception, try to correct the interference by using one or more of the following measures: • Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops. • Move the equipment to one side or the other of the television or radio. • Move the equipment farther away from the television or radio. • Plug the equipment into an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio. (That is, make certain the equipment and the television or radio are on circuits controlled by different circuit breakers or fuses.) Modifications to this product not authorized by Cisco Systems, Inc. could void the FCC approval and negate your authority to operate the product. The following third-party software may be included with your product and will be subject to the software license agreement: CiscoWorks software and documentation are based in part on HP OpenView under license from the Hewlett-Packard Company. HP OpenView is a trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. Copyright © 1992, 1993 Hewlett-Packard Company. The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as part of UCB’s public domain version of the UNIX operating system. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1981, Regents of the University of California. Network Time Protocol (NTP). Copyright © 1992, David L. Mills. The University of Delaware makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. Point-to-Point Protocol. Copyright © 1989, Carnegie-Mellon University. All rights reserved. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. The Cisco implementation of TN3270 is an adaptation of the TN3270, curses, and termcap programs developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as part of UCB’s public domain version of the UNIX operating system. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1981-1988, Regents of the University of California. Cisco incorporates Fastmac and TrueView software and the RingRunner chip in some Token Ring products. Fastmac software is licensed to Cisco by Madge Networks Limited, and the RingRunner chip is licensed to Cisco by Madge NV. Fastmac, RingRunner, and TrueView are trademarks and in some jurisdictions registered trademarks of Madge Networks Limited. Copyright © 1995, Madge Networks Limited. All rights reserved. XRemote is a trademark of Network Computing Devices, Inc. Copyright © 1989, Network Computing Devices, Inc., Mountain View, California. NCD makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. The X Window System is a trademark of the X Consortium, Cambridge, Massachusetts. All rights reserved. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN, ALL DOCUMENT FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” WITH ALL FAULTS. CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE. IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. CCIP, CCSP, the Cisco Arrow logo, the Cisco Powered Network mark, Cisco Unity, Follow Me Browsing, FormShare, and StackWise are trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc.; Changing the Way We Work, Live, Play, and Learn, and iQuick Study are service marks of Cisco Systems, Inc.; and Aironet, ASIST, BPX, Catalyst, CCDA, CCDP, CCIE, CCNA, CCNP, Cisco, the Cisco Certified Internetwork Expert logo, Cisco IOS, the Cisco IOS logo, Cisco Press, Cisco Systems, Cisco Systems Capital, the Cisco Systems logo, Empowering the Internet Generation, Enterprise/Solver, EtherChannel, EtherFast, EtherSwitch, Fast Step, GigaDrive, GigaStack, HomeLink, Internet Quotient, IOS, IP/TV, iQ Expertise, the iQ logo, iQ Net Readiness Scorecard, LightStream, Linksys, MeetingPlace, MGX, the Networkers logo, Networking Academy, Network Registrar, Packet, PIX, Post-Routing, Pre-Routing, ProConnect, RateMUX, Registrar, ScriptShare, SlideCast, SMARTnet, StrataView Plus, SwitchProbe, TeleRouter, The Fastest Way to Increase Your Internet Quotient, TransPath, and VCO are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the United States and certain other countries. All other trademarks mentioned in this document or Website are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (0403R) Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Copyright © 1997–2004, Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. CONTENTS About This Guide xix Document Objectives Audience xix xix Document Organization xx Document Conventions xxi Obtaining Documentation Cisco.com xxiv xxiv Ordering Documentation xxv Documentation Feedback xxv Obtaining Technical Assistance xxv Cisco Technical Support Website Submitting a Service Request xxvi xxvi Definitions of Service Request Severity xxvii Obtaining Additional Publications and Information Chapter 1 Product Overview xxvii 1-1 Physical and Functional Overviews 1-2 Gigabit Route Processor 1-4 GRP Memory Components 1-7 System Status LEDs 1-10 Soft Reset Switch 1-11 PCMCIA Slots 1-12 Asynchronous Serial Ports 1-12 Ethernet Port 1-12 Performance Route Processor 1-13 PRP Memory Components 1-17 System Status LEDs 1-20 Soft Reset Switch 1-21 Flash Disk Slots 1-21 Asynchronous Serial Ports 1-22 Table of Contents v Ethernet Ports 1-22 Line Cards 1-22 Alarm Card 1-23 Switch Fabric 1-25 Power Supplies 1-28 AC-Input Power Supply 1-29 DC-Input power Supply 1-30 Power Distribution 1-32 Blower Module 1-34 Air Filter 1-37 Cable-Management System 1-37 Maintenance Bus 1-39 System Specifications Agency Approvals Chapter 2 1-40 1-42 Preparing for Installation 2-1 Safety Recommendations 2-2 Lifting Guidelines 2-3 Safety with Electricity 2-4 Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage Laser Safety 2-6 2-5 Site Requirement Guidelines 2-6 Rack-Mounting Guidelines 2-7 Airflow Guidelines 2-10 Temperature and Humidity Guidelines 2-10 Power Guidelines 2-11 AC-Powered Systems 2-12 DC-Powered Systems 2-14 System Grounding Connection Guidelines 2-15 Site Wiring Guidelines 2-15 SONET Connection Guidelines 2-16 Power Budget 2-17 Approximating the Line Card Power Margin 2-18 Multimode Power Budget Example with Sufficient Power for Transmission 2-20 vi Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Multimode Power Budget Example of Dispersion Limit Single-Mode Transmission 2-21 SONET Single-Mode Power Budget Example 2-21 Using Statistics to Estimate the Power Budget 2-22 Tools for Installation 2-22 Unpacking the Cisco 12012 2-23 Checking the Shipping Packaging Contents Site Log Chapter 3 2-20 2-23 2-24 Installing a Cisco 12012 3-1 Installing the Brace Bar 3-3 Removing the Cisco 12012 Components before Installing the Frame Removing the Blower Modules 3-5 Removing Cards from the Card Cage Assembly 3-7 Removing the Cards from the Upper Card Cage 3-8 Removing the Cards from the Lower Card Cage 3-10 Removing a DC-Input Power Supply 3-14 Removing an AC-Input Power Supply 3-16 Removing the Card Cage Assembly 3-18 Rack-Mounting the Frame 3-4 3-20 Reinstalling the Cisco 12012 Components after Installing the Frame 3-23 Reinstalling the Card Cage Assembly 3-24 Reinstalling the Blower Modules 3-25 Reinstalling the Cards in the Upper Card Cage 3-26 Reinstalling the Cards in the Lower Card Cage 3-28 Connecting Line Card Cables 3-30 Connecting Route Processor Cables 3-33 GRP Console and Auxiliary Port Connection Equipment GRP Console Port Signals 3-35 GRP Auxiliary Port Signals 3-35 GRP Ethernet Connection Equipment 3-36 3-33 Table of Contents vii PRP Console and Auxiliary Port Connection Guidelines PRP Console Port Signals 3-42 PRP Auxiliary Port Signals 3-42 PRP Ethernet Connection Equipment 3-43 PRP Ethernet Connections 3-44 Connecting Alarm Card Cables 3-48 Connecting System Grounding 3-50 3-40 Connecting Power 3-53 Reinstalling an AC-Input Power Supply 3-54 Reinstalling a DC-Input Power Supply 3-57 Chapter 4 Observing System Startup and Performing a Basic Configuration Checking Connections in Preparation for System Startup Starting the System and Observing Initial Conditions Manually Booting the System 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-7 Configuring the Cisco 12012 4-8 Performing a Basic Manual Configuration Using the Setup Facility or the setup Command 4-8 Configuring the Global Parameters 4-9 Configuring Interfaces 4-15 Performing a Basic Configuration Using Configuration Mode 4-20 Checking the Running Configuration Settings before Saving Them 4-21 Saving the Running Configuration Settings and Reviewing Your Configuration 4-21 Implementing Other Configuration Tasks 4-23 Configuring the Software Configuration Register 4-24 Boot Field Settings and the boot Command 4-26 Changing Configuration Register Settings 4-27 Configuration Register Bit Meanings 4-28 Recovering a Lost Password 4-31 Using Flash Memory Cards in the RP 4-34 Installing and Removing the Flash Memory Card in a RP viii Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide 4-34 Formatting a Flash Memory Card 4-37 Specifying the Cisco IOS Image Used to Boot the System 4-38 Software Commands Associated with Flash Memory 4-38 Enabling Booting from Flash Memory 4-40 Copying Files to Flash Memory 4-41 Copying a Cisco IOS Software Image into a Flash Memory Card 4-42 Copying Cisco IOS Software Images between Flash Memory Cards 4-44 Copying System Configuration Files Between RP Memory and a Flash Memory Card 4-46 Recovering from Locked Blocks in Flash Memory Cards 4-49 What To Do Next? 4-50 If You Need More Configuration Information Chapter 5 Troubleshooting the Installation 4-50 5-1 Troubleshooting Overview 5-2 Problem Solving with Subsystems 5-2 Identifying Startup Problems 5-4 Troubleshooting the Power Subsystem 5-7 Troubleshooting the Processor Subsystem Troubleshooting the RP 5-10 Troubleshooting the Line Cards 5-12 Troubleshooting Using the Alarm Card Troubleshooting the Cooling Subsystem 5-9 5-14 5-15 Additional Reference Information for Troubleshooting Chapter 6 Running Diagnostics on the Cisco 12012 Diagnostic Test Overview 6-1 Using the diag Command 6-3 Diagnostic Testing Sequence 5-17 6-1 6-4 Loading and Running Diagnostics 6-4 Table of Contents ix Diagnostic Examples 6-6 Without verbose Option 6-6 With verbose Option 6-7 Failed Diagnostic 6-9 Chapter 7 Maintaining the Cisco 12012 7-1 Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filter Assembly 7-2 Removing the Air Filter 7-3 Cleaning the Air Filter 7-7 Replacing the Air Filter Assembly 7-7 Removing the Old Air Filter Assembly 7-7 Installing A New Air Filter Assembly 7-9 Removing and Replacing an AC-Input Power Supply 7-12 Removing an AC-Input Power Supply 7-12 Installing a New or Replacement AC-Input Power Supply 7-15 Checking the Replacement of an AC-Input Power Supply 7-17 Removing and Replacing a DC-Input Power Supply 7-19 Removing a DC-Input Power Supply 7-19 Installing a New or Replacement DC-Input Power Supply 7-25 Checking the Replacement of a DC-Input Power Supply 7-30 Removing and Replacing a Blower Module 7-32 Removing and Replacing the Card Cage Assembly 7-33 Powering Down the Cisco 12012 7-34 Removing the Power Supplies 7-34 Removing the Cards from the Upper Card Cage 7-34 Removing a Line Card from the Upper Card Cage 7-35 Removing a RP from the Upper Card Cage 7-37 Removing an Alarm Card from the Upper Card Cage 7-37 Removing the Cards from the Lower Card Cage 7-38 Removing the System Grounding 7-38 Removing the Card Cage Assembly 7-39 Installing a New Card Cage Assembly 7-39 Replacing the Cards in the Lower Card Cage 7-40 Replacing the Cards in the Upper Card Cage 7-40 Reattaching the System Grounding 7-41 x Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Replacing the Power Supplies 7-41 Removing and Replacing a Route Processor Removing and Replacing an Alarm Card 7-42 7-43 Removing and Replacing a Clock and Scheduler Card or Switch Fabric Card 7-45 Upgrading RP and Line Card Memory Appendix A Repackaging the Cisco 12012 Tools Required 7-45 A-1 A-2 Safety Recommendations A-2 Removing the Cisco 12012 from a Rack A-3 Powering Down the Cisco 12012 A-3 Removing the Blower Modules A-3 Removing the Card Cage Assembly A-3 Removing the Frame from the Rack A-4 Replacing Components in the Cisco 12012 A-6 Replacing the Blower Modules A-6 Replacing the Card Cage Assembly A-6 Completing the Repackaging A-7 Repackaging the Redundant AC-Input Power Supplies A-7 Repackaging the Accessories Box A-8 Installing the Side Panels, End Panels, and Top of the Shipping Container A-8 Table of Contents xi xii Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide FIGU RES Figure 1-1 Cisco 12012 (Front View, AC-Input Power Supplies Shown) 1-3 Figure 1-2 Gigabit Route Processor (Front Panel View, Horizontal Orientation Shown) Figure 1-3 GRP (Horizontal Orientation Shown) Figure 1-4 Performance Route Processor (Front Panel View, Horizontal Orientation Shown) 1-14 Figure 1-5 PRP (Horizontal Orientation) Figure 1-6 Alarm Card Faceplate LEDs, Switches, and Connectors Figure 1-7 Lower Card Cage Figure 1-8 AC-Input Power Supply 1-30 Figure 1-9 DC-Input Power Supply 1-32 1-5 1-8 1-16 1-25 1-26 Figure 1-10 Cisco 12012 Power Distribution 1-33 Figure 1-11 Blower Module (Shown without the Blower Module Front Cover) Figure 1-12 Internal Air Flow (Side View) Figure 1-13 Cable-Management System 1-34 1-35 1-38 Figure 2-1 Cisco 12012 Frame Outer Dimensions (Top View) 2-9 Figure 2-2 AC Power Cords Figure 2-3 DC Power Cable Lug Figure 3-1 Installing the Brace Bar Figure 3-2 Removing the Blower Module Front Cover Figure 3-3 Removing the Blower Module Figure 3-4 Cisco 12012 Card Cage Assembly Figure 3-5 Removing a Card from the Upper Card Cage (GRP Shown) Figure 3-6 Opening the Air Filter Tray Figure 3-7 Latching the Lower Card Cage Air Deflector 2-13 2-14 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-9 3-11 3-12 List of Figures xiii Figure 3-8 Removing Cards from the Lower Card Cage Figure 3-9 Removing a DC-Input Power Supply 3-13 3-15 Figure 3-10 Removing the Card Cage Assembly from the Frame Figure 3-11 Frame Mounting Hole Groups Figure 3-12 Installing the Frame in the Rack Figure 3-13 Attaching an Interface Cable to a Line Card Figure 3-14 Console and Auxiliary Port Connections Figure 3-15 RJ-45 and MII Ethernet Connections Figure 3-16 Ethernet MII Receptacle Figure 3-17 Ethernet RJ-45 Receptacle Figure 3-18 PRP Console and Auxiliary Port Connections Figure 3-19 Using the Ethernet Port on the PRP Figure 3-20 RJ-45 Receptacle and Plug (Horizontal Orientation) Figure 3-21 Straight-Through Cable Pinout (Connecting MDI Ethernet Port to MDI-X Wiring) 3-46 Figure 3-22 Crossover Cable Pinout (for Connecting Two PRPs) Figure 3-23 Alarm Card Connectors Figure 3-24 System Grounding Receptacles Figure 3-25 Attaching a Grounding Lug to the Grounding Receptacles Figure 3-26 Connecting Source AC to the AC-Input Power Supply Figure 3-27 DC Power Cable Lug Figure 3-28 Removing the DC-Input Power Supply Front Cover and Cable Bracket Figure 3-29 Connecting the Source DC Power Cable Leads to the DC-Input Power Supply Figure 3-30 Reinstalling the DC-Input Power Supply Figure 4-1 3-19 3-20 3-22 3-32 3-33 3-37 3-38 3-39 3-41 3-44 3-45 3-46 3-48 3-51 3-52 3-55 3-57 3-63 RP Alphanumeric LED Displays (Partial Front Panel View) xiv Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide 4-3 3-59 3-61 Figure 4-2 Installing and Removing a Flash Memory Card 4-36 Figure 7-1 Connecting an ESD-Preventive Strap to the Cisco 12012 Figure 7-2 Removing the Air Filter Figure 7-3 Removing the Screws from the Old Air Filter Tray Figure 7-4 New Air Filter Hinge Holes and Chassis Holes Alignment Figure 7-5 Installing the New Air Filter in the New Air Filter Tray Figure 7-6 Disconnecting an AC-Input Power Supply Figure 7-7 Removing an AC-Input Power Supply Figure 7-8 Removing a DC-Input Power Supply Figure 7-9 Removing the DC-Input Power Supply Front Cover 7-4 7-6 7-8 7-10 7-11 7-13 7-14 7-21 Figure 7-10 Removing the Power Cable Bracket Figure 7-11 Disconnecting the DC-Input Power Supply Figure 7-12 DC Power Cable Lug Figure 7-13 Installing a DC-Input Power Supply Figure 7-14 Removing the Interface Cables from a Line Card Figure 7-15 Removing an Alarm Card 7-22 7-23 7-24 7-26 7-29 7-36 7-44 Figure A-1 Removing the Frame from the Rack Figure A-2 Cisco 12012 Shipping Packaging A-5 A-9 List of Figures xv xvi Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide TA BLES Table 1-1 GRP Memory Components 1-7 Table 1-2 DRAM Configurations Table 1-3 PRP Memory Components Table 1-4 Supported Flash Disk Sizes and Product Numbers Table 1-5 Switch Fabric Configurations Table 1-6 Cisco 12012 Physical Specifications Table 1-7 Cisco 12012 Electrical Specifications Table 1-8 Cisco 12012 Environmental Specifications Table 1-9 Agency Approvals Table 2-1 Site Environment Requirements Table 2-2 Source AC Power Specifications Table 2-3 AC Power Cord International Options Table 2-4 Source DC Power Specifications Table 2-5 SONET Maximum Fiber-Optic Transmission Distances Table 2-6 Typical Fiber-Optic Link Attenuation and Dispersion Limits Table 2-7 Estimating Link Loss Table 2-8 Line Card SONET Signal Requirements Table 2-9 Site Log Example Table 3-1 GRP Console Port Signals Table 3-2 Auxiliary Port Signals Table 3-3 Ethernet MII Pinout Table 3-4 Ethernet RJ-45 Pinout Table 3-5 PRP Console Port Signals Table 3-6 PRP Auxiliary Port Signals 1-9 1-17 1-19 1-27 1-40 1-41 1-41 1-42 2-11 2-12 2-13 2-14 2-17 2-18 2-19 2-19 2-25 3-35 3-35 3-38 3-39 3-42 3-42 List of Tables xvii Table 3-7 PRP RJ-45 Ethernet Receptacle Pinout Table 3-8 Specifications and Connection Limits for 100-Mbps Transmission Table 3-9 IEEE 802.3u Physical Characteristics Table 3-10 3-45 3-47 3-47 Alarm 1 and Alarm 2 Connector Pinout 3-49 Table 4-1 RP Alphanumeric LED Display Sequences 4-4 Table 4-2 Line Card Alphanumeric LED Display Sequences Table 4-3 Software Configuration Register Bit Meanings Table 4-4 Explanation of Boot Field (Configuration Register Bits 00 to 03) Table 4-5 Default Boot Filenames Table 4-6 Configuration Register Settings for Broadcast Address Destination Table 4-7 System Console Terminal Transmission Rate Settings Table 5-1 RP Alphanumeric LED Display Messages Table 5-2 Line Card Alphanumeric LED Display Messages 4-4 4-25 4-25 4-29 5-10 5-13 xviii Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide 4-30 4-30 About This Guide This section explains the objectives, intended audience, and organization of this installation and configuration guide. Also included are the conventions used to convey instructions and information. Cisco documentation and additional literature are available in a CD-ROM package, which ships with your product. The Documentation CD-ROM, a member of the Cisco Connection Family, is updated monthly. Therefore, it might be more up to date than printed documentation. To order additional copies of the Documentation CD-ROM, contact your local sales representative or call customer service. The CD-ROM package is available as a single package or as an annual subscription. You can also access Cisco documentation on the World Wide Web at http://www.cisco.com, http://www-china.cisco.com, or http://www-europe.cisco.com. Document Objectives This installation and configuration guide explains the hardware installation and basic configuration procedures for a Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router (GSR). It contains procedures for installing the hardware, creating a basic configuration file, and starting up the router. After completing the installation and basic configuration procedures covered in this guide, you will then use the appropriate companion publications to configure your system more completely. Audience To use this publication, you should be familiar with Cisco or equivalent router hardware and cabling, electronic circuitry and wiring practices, and preferably have experience as an electronic or electromechanical technician. About This Guide xix Document Organization Document Organization This installation and configuration guide is organized into the following chapters and appendixes: • Chapter 1, “Product Overview,” provides an introduction to the Cisco 12012 with a description of the system’s components. • Chapter 2, “Preparing for Installation,” is a preparatory chapter that describes safety considerations, tools required, an overview of the installation, and procedures you should perform before the actual installation. • Chapter 3, “Installing a Cisco 12012,” provides instructions for installing the hardware and connecting the external network interface cables. • Chapter 4, “Observing System Startup and Performing a Basic Configuration,” provides simple procedures for completing a basic system configuration and for checking and saving this configuration to system memory. • Chapter 5, “Troubleshooting the Installation,” provides guidelines for troubleshooting the Cisco 12012 hardware installation. • Chapter 6, “Running Diagnostics on the Cisco 12012,” describes how to load and run the Cisco 12012 field diagnostics. • Chapter 7, “Maintaining the Cisco 12012,” provides simple maintenance procedures that you might need to perform after you have installed the Cisco 12012. Also included are removal and replacement procedures for the field replaceable units. • Appendix A, “Repackaging the Cisco 12012,” provides instructions on repacking the Cisco 12012 if you need to transport it to another site. xx Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Document Conventions Document Conventions This publication uses the following conventions: • The symbol ^ represents the key labeled Control. For example, the key combination ^z means hold down the Control key while you press the z key. Command descriptions use these conventions: • Examples that contain system prompts denote interactive sessions, indicating the commands that you should enter at the prompt. The system prompt indicates the current level of the EXEC command interpreter. For example, the prompt router> indicates that you should be at the user level, and the prompt router# indicates that you should be at the privileged level. Access to the privileged level usually requires a password. Refer to the related software configuration and reference documentation listed in the section “If You Need More Configuration Information” in Chapter 4 for additional information. • • • • Commands and keywords are in boldface font. Arguments for which you supply values are in italic font. Elements in square brackets ([ ]) are optional. Alternative but required keywords are grouped in braces ({ }) and separated by vertical bars (|). Examples use these conventions: • • • • • Terminal sessions and sample console screen displays are in screen font. Information you enter is in boldface screen font. Nonprinting characters, such as passwords, are in angle brackets (< >). Default responses to system prompts are in square brackets ([ ]). Exclamation points (!) at the beginning of a line indicate a comment line. About This Guide xxi Document Conventions Caution Means reader be careful. You are capable of doing something that might result in equipment damage or loss of data. Note Means reader take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to materials not contained in this manual. Timesaver Means the described action saves time. You can save time by performing the action described in the paragraph. Warning This warning symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury. Before you work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents. To see translations of the warnings that appear in this publication, refer to the Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information document that accompanied this device. Waarschuwing Dit waarschuwingssymbool betekent gevaar. U verkeert in een situatie die lichamelijk letsel kan veroorzaken. Voordat u aan enige apparatuur gaat werken, dient u zich bewust te zijn van de bij elektrische schakelingen betrokken risico's en dient u op de hoogte te zijn van standaard maatregelen om ongelukken te voorkomen. Voor vertalingen van de waarschuwingen die in deze publicatie verschijnen, kunt u het document Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information (Informatie over naleving van veiligheids- en andere voorschriften) raadplegen dat bij dit toestel is ingesloten. Varoitus Tämä varoitusmerkki merkitsee vaaraa. Olet tilanteessa, joka voi johtaa ruumiinvammaan. Ennen kuin työskentelet minkään laitteiston parissa, ota selvää sähkökytkentöihin liittyvistä vaaroista ja tavanomaisista onnettomuuksien ehkäisykeinoista. Tässä julkaisussa esiintyvien varoitusten käännökset löydät laitteen mukana olevasta Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information -kirjasesta (määräysten noudattaminen ja tietoa turvallisuudesta). xxii Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Document Conventions Attention Ce symbole d'avertissement indique un danger. Vous vous trouvez dans une situation pouvant causer des blessures ou des dommages corporels. Avant de travailler sur un équipement, soyez conscient des dangers posés par les circuits électriques et familiarisez-vous avec les procédures couramment utilisées pour éviter les accidents. Pour prendre connaissance des traductions d’avertissements figurant dans cette publication, consultez le document Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information (Conformité aux règlements et consignes de sécurité) qui accompagne cet appareil. Warnung Dieses Warnsymbol bedeutet Gefahr. Sie befinden sich in einer Situation, die zu einer Körperverletzung führen könnte. Bevor Sie mit der Arbeit an irgendeinem Gerät beginnen, seien Sie sich der mit elektrischen Stromkreisen verbundenen Gefahren und der Standardpraktiken zur Vermeidung von Unfällen bewußt. Übersetzungen der in dieser Veröffentlichung enthaltenen Warnhinweise finden Sie im Dokument Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information (Informationen zu behördlichen Vorschriften und Sicherheit), das zusammen mit diesem Gerät geliefert wurde. Avvertenza Questo simbolo di avvertenza indica un pericolo. La situazione potrebbe causare infortuni alle persone. Prima di lavorare su qualsiasi apparecchiatura, occorre conoscere i pericoli relativi ai circuiti elettrici ed essere al corrente delle pratiche standard per la prevenzione di incidenti. La traduzione delle avvertenze riportate in questa pubblicazione si trova nel documento Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information (Conformità alle norme e informazioni sulla sicurezza) che accompagna questo dispositivo. Advarsel Dette varselsymbolet betyr fare. Du befinner deg i en situasjon som kan føre til personskade. Før du utfører arbeid på utstyr, må du vare oppmerksom på de faremomentene som elektriske kretser innebærer, samt gjøre deg kjent med vanlig praksis når det gjelder å unngå ulykker. Hvis du vil se oversettelser av de advarslene som finnes i denne publikasjonen, kan du se i dokumentet Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information (Overholdelse av forskrifter og sikkerhetsinformasjon) som ble levert med denne enheten. Aviso Este símbolo de aviso indica perigo. Encontra-se numa situação que lhe poderá causar danos físicos. Antes de começar a trabalhar com qualquer equipamento, familiarize-se com os perigos relacionados com circuitos eléctricos, e com quaisquer práticas comuns que possam prevenir possíveis acidentes. Para ver as traduções dos avisos que constam desta publicação, consulte o documento Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information (Informação de Segurança e Disposições Reguladoras) que acompanha este dispositivo. About This Guide xxiii Obtaining Documentation ¡Advertencia! Este símbolo de aviso significa peligro. Existe riesgo para su integridad física. Antes de manipular cualquier equipo, considerar los riesgos que entraña la corriente eléctrica y familiarizarse con los procedimientos estándar de prevención de accidentes. Para ver una traducción de las advertencias que aparecen en esta publicación, consultar el documento titulado Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information (Información sobre seguridad y conformidad con las disposiciones reglamentarias) que se acompaña con este dispositivo. Varning! Denna varningssymbol signalerar fara. Du befinner dig i en situation som kan leda till personskada. Innan du utför arbete på någon utrustning måste du vara medveten om farorna med elkretsar och känna till vanligt förfarande för att förebygga skador. Se förklaringar av de varningar som förkommer i denna publikation i dokumentet Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information (Efterrättelse av föreskrifter och säkerhetsinformation), vilket medföljer denna anordning. Obtaining Documentation Cisco documentation and additional literature are available on Cisco.com. Cisco also provides several ways to obtain technical assistance and other technical resources. These sections explain how to obtain technical information from Cisco Systems. Cisco.com You can access the most current Cisco documentation at this URL: http://www.cisco.com/univercd/home/home.htm You can access the Cisco website at this URL: http://www.cisco.com You can access international Cisco websites at this URL: http://www.cisco.com/public/countries_languages.shtml xxiv Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Ordering Documentation Ordering Documentation You can find instructions for ordering documentation at this URL: http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/es_inpck/pdi.htm You can order Cisco documentation in these ways: • Registered Cisco.com users (Cisco direct customers) can order Cisco product documentation from the Ordering tool: http://www.cisco.com/en/US/partner/ordering/index.shtml • Nonregistered Cisco.com users can order documentation through a local account representative by calling Cisco Systems Corporate Headquarters (California, USA) at 408 526-7208 or, elsewhere in North America, by calling 800 553-NETS (6387). Documentation Feedback You can send comments about technical documentation to [email protected]. You can submit comments by using the response card (if present) behind the front cover of your document or by writing to the following address: Cisco Systems Attn: Customer Document Ordering 170 West Tasman Drive San Jose, CA 95134-9883 We appreciate your comments. Obtaining Technical Assistance For all customers, partners, resellers, and distributors who hold valid Cisco service contracts, Cisco Technical Support provides 24-hour-a-day, award-winning technical assistance. The Cisco Technical Support Website on Cisco.com features extensive online support resources. In addition, Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC) engineers provide telephone support. If you do not hold a valid Cisco service contract, contact your reseller. About This Guide xxv Cisco Technical Support Website Cisco Technical Support Website The Cisco Technical Support Website provides online documents and tools for troubleshooting and resolving technical issues with Cisco products and technologies. The website is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year at this URL: http://www.cisco.com/techsupport Access to all tools on the Cisco Technical Support Website requires a Cisco.com user ID and password. If you have a valid service contract but do not have a user ID or password, you can register at this URL: http://tools.cisco.com/RPF/register/register.do Submitting a Service Request Using the online TAC Service Request Tool is the fastest way to open S3 and S4 service requests. (S3 and S4 service requests are those in which your network is minimally impaired or for which you require product information.) After you describe your situation, the TAC Service Request Tool automatically provides recommended solutions. If your issue is not resolved using the recommended resources, your service request will be assigned to a Cisco TAC engineer. The TAC Service Request Tool is located at this URL: http://www.cisco.com/techsupport/servicerequest For S1 or S2 service requests or if you do not have Internet access, contact the Cisco TAC by telephone. (S1 or S2 service requests are those in which your production network is down or severely degraded.) Cisco TAC engineers are assigned immediately to S1 and S2 service requests to help keep your business operations running smoothly. To open a service request by telephone, use one of the following numbers: Asia-Pacific: +61 2 8446 7411 (Australia: 1 800 805 227) EMEA: +32 2 704 55 55 USA: 1 800 553 2447 For a complete list of Cisco TAC contacts, go to this URL: http://www.cisco.com/techsupport/contacts xxvi Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Definitions of Service Request Severity Definitions of Service Request Severity To ensure that all service requests are reported in a standard format, Cisco has established severity definitions. Severity 1 (S1)—Your network is “down,” or there is a critical impact to your business operations. You and Cisco will commit all necessary resources around the clock to resolve the situation. Severity 2 (S2)—Operation of an existing network is severely degraded, or significant aspects of your business operation are negatively affected by inadequate performance of Cisco products. You and Cisco will commit full-time resources during normal business hours to resolve the situation. Severity 3 (S3)—Operational performance of your network is impaired, but most business operations remain functional. You and Cisco will commit resources during normal business hours to restore service to satisfactory levels. Severity 4 (S4)—You require information or assistance with Cisco product capabilities, installation, or configuration. There is little or no effect on your business operations. Obtaining Additional Publications and Information Information about Cisco products, technologies, and network solutions is available from various online and printed sources. • Cisco Marketplace provides a variety of Cisco books, reference guides, and logo merchandise. Visit Cisco Marketplace, the company store, at this URL: http://www.cisco.com/go/marketplace/ • The Cisco Product Catalog describes the networking products offered by Cisco Systems, as well as ordering and customer support services. Access the Cisco Product Catalog at this URL: http://cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/pcat/ • Cisco Press publishes a wide range of general networking, training and certification titles. Both new and experienced users will benefit from these publications. For current Cisco Press titles and other information, go to Cisco Press at this URL: http://www.ciscopress.com About This Guide xxvii Obtaining Additional Publications and Information • Packet magazine is the Cisco Systems technical user magazine for maximizing Internet and networking investments. Each quarter, Packet delivers coverage of the latest industry trends, technology breakthroughs, and Cisco products and solutions, as well as network deployment and troubleshooting tips, configuration examples, customer case studies, certification and training information, and links to scores of in-depth online resources. You can access Packet magazine at this URL: http://www.cisco.com/packet • iQ Magazine is the quarterly publication from Cisco Systems designed to help growing companies learn how they can use technology to increase revenue, streamline their business, and expand services. The publication identifies the challenges facing these companies and the technologies to help solve them, using real-world case studies and business strategies to help readers make sound technology investment decisions. You can access iQ Magazine at this URL: http://www.cisco.com/go/iqmagazine • Internet Protocol Journal is a quarterly journal published by Cisco Systems for engineering professionals involved in designing, developing, and operating public and private internets and intranets. You can access the Internet Protocol Journal at this URL: http://www.cisco.com/ipj • World-class networking training is available from Cisco. You can view current offerings at this URL: http://www.cisco.com/en/US/learning/index.html xxviii Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide CHAPTER 1 Product Overview This chapter provides physical and functional overviews of the Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router (GSR). It contains physical descriptions of the router hardware and major components, and functional descriptions of the hardware-related features. The Cisco 12012 is a member of the Cisco 12000 series of gigabit switch routers. The Cisco 12012 is aimed at scaling the Internet and enterprise backbones to speeds of OC-3/STM-1 (155 Mbps), OC-12/STM-4 (622 Mbps), and OC-48/STM-16 (2.4 Gbps). The Cisco 12012 is built around a high-speed switching fabric that is scalable from 5 to 60 Gbps, providing high-performance to support IP-based local and wide-area networks (WANs). The Cisco 12012 has two separate card cages; the upper card cage and the lower card cage. The upper card cage has 12 user-configurable slots that support a combination of line cards and a Route Processor (RP). The rightmost slot in the upper card cage supports a non-configurable alarm card. Network interfaces reside on line cards that provide connection between the router’s switch fabric and the external networks. The lower card cage has five slots for the cards containing the switch fabric: clock and scheduler cards (CSCs) and switch fabric cards (SFCs). The lower card cage is keyed; the top two slots accept clock and scheduler cards, and the lower three slots accept switch fabric cards. You can configure the Cisco 12012 for either source AC operation or source DC operation. AC-input or DC-input power supplies reside in a power supply bay located near the bottom of the frame. Note The Cisco 12012 does not support a mixture of AC- and DC-input power supplies. Product Overview 1-1 Physical and Functional Overviews Warning AC operation requires a minimum configuration of two AC-input power supplies. Two blower modules, one mounted at the top of the frame and one mounted at the bottom of the frame, provide cooling air to the system. Physical and Functional Overviews The Cisco 12012 is a modular system consisting of the following components (see Figure 1-1): • Frame—a rigid metal structure that is 19-inches (48.3-cm) wide, 21-inches (53.3-cm) deep, and 56-inches (142.2-cm) high and weighs 75 lb (34 kg) empty. Three sets of rails in the frame support the other three major components: a card cage assembly and two blower modules. The frame mounts into either a telco-style or four-post rack that is secured to the building structure. • Card cage assembly—a sheet metal enclosure that mounts in the frame. The card cage assembly consists of the upper card cage, the lower card cage, and the power supply bay. All three components are tied together electrically through a passive system backplane in the back of the card cage assembly. The upper card cage has 12 vertical slots for line cards and an RP. A unique slot (rightmost slot) in the upper card cage supports an alarm card. The lower card cage has five horizontal slots for the switch fabric. A removable air filter in a hinged air filter tray is mounted in front of the lower card cage. The power supply bay is at the bottom of the card cage assembly; it has slots for up to four AC-input power supplies or up to two DC-input power supplies. • Blower modules—two identical blower modules that slide on rails into the top and bottom of the frame. They provide cooling air for all of the components in the card cage. 1-2 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Physical and Functional Overviews Figure 1-1 Cisco 12012 (Front View, AC-Input Power Supplies Shown) Top blower module (behind front cover) Frame 0 EJE R IVE RIE PKT ACT CAR RX CT T-1 SLO T-0 SLO 0 0 X 1 ET AU RES CRI R L IVE RIE CEL ACT CAR RX R L IVE RIE CEL ACT CAR RX AL OR OR TIC MAJ MIN R IVE RIE PKT ACT CAR RX 2 E SOL CON ACO R IVE RIE PKT ACT CAR RX /LT ALARM 1 3 TX L COL RX R IVE RIE PKT ACT CAR RX LINK Upper card cage MII 5 ALARM 2 RJ-4 ENA FAIL D BLE 0 OC-12/STM-4 POS 1 CSC 0 1 2 ALARM SFC Q OC-3/STM-POS OC-12/STM-4 ATM ROUTE PROCESSOR Air filter tray Lower card cage (behind air filter) INPUT: 200 -240V 10 A 50/60 HZ 2000 W ~ INPUT: 200 -240V 10 A 50/60 HZ 2000 W ~ INPUT: 200 -240V 10 A 50/60 HZ 2000 W ~ INPUT: 200 -240V 10 A 50/60 HZ 2000 W ~ Power supply bay Bottom blower module (behind front cover) AC OK OUTPUT FAIL AC OK OUTPUT FAIL AC OK OUTPUT FAIL H10476 AC OK OUTPUT FAIL Product Overview 1-3 Physical and Functional Overviews The front of the Cisco 12012 provides access to all system components, making the system easy to service. All its major components are field-replaceable units (FRUs), including the following: • • • • • • • Gigabit Route Processor (GRP) or Performance Route Processor (PRP) Line cards Clock and scheduler cards Switch fabric cards Alarm card Power supplies Blower modules The following sections provide brief overviews of each FRU. Chapter 7, “Maintaining the Cisco 12012,” and separate documents called configuration notes contain instructions for removing and replacing FRUs. For information on ordering FRUs, contact a customer service representative. Gigabit Route Processor Each Cisco 12012 GSR has one main system (or route) processor. The route processor (RP) processes the network routing protocols and distributes updates to the Cisco Express Forwarding (CEF) tables on the line cards. The RP also performs general maintenance functions, such as diagnostics, console support, and line card monitoring. Two types of RPs are available for the Cisco 12012 GSR: • • Gigabit Route Processor (GRP) Performance Route Processor (PRP) When not explicitly specified, this document uses the term route processor (RP) to indicate either the GRP or the PRP. Note If you install a second, redundant RP, it must be of the same type as the primary RP. 1-4 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Physical and Functional Overviews This section provides information about the Gigabit Route Processor (GRP) (see Figure 1-2) and its use as the main system processor for the Cisco 12012. This section provides information on the following GRP functionality: • • • • • • Memory components System status LEDs Soft reset switch PCMCIA slots Asynchronous serial ports Ethernet port If you have a PRP, see the “Performance Route Processor” section. -1 OT SL -0 OT SL 5 -4 RJ LL CO RX T SE RE CO NS OL E T EC EJ K LIN TX H10548 Gigabit Route Processor (Front Panel View, Horizontal Orientation Shown) AU X Figure 1-2 MII GIGABIT ROUTE PROCESSOR The primary functions of the GRP are as follows: • • • • Downloading the Cisco IOS software to all of the installed line cards at power up • • • Running routing protocols Providing a console (terminal) port for router configuration Providing an auxiliary port for other external equipment (such as modems) Providing an IEEE 802.3, 10/100-megabits-per-second (Mbps) Ethernet port for Telnet functionality Building and distributing routing tables to line cards Providing general system maintenance functions Product Overview 1-5 Physical and Functional Overviews The GRP communicates with the line cards either through the switch fabric or through a maintenance bus (MBus). The switch fabric connection is the main data path for routing table distribution as well as for packets that are sent between the line cards and the GRP. The MBus connection allows the GRP to download a system bootstrap image, collect or load diagnostic information, and perform general, internal system maintenance operations. The GRP plugs into any slot in the upper card cage in the Cisco 12012 except the rightmost slot, which is reserved for the alarm card. The GRP contains the following components: • IDT R5000 Reduced Instruction Set Computing (RISC) processor used for the CPU. The CPU runs at an external bus clock speed of 100 MHz and an internal clock speed of 200 MHz. • Up to 256 megabytes (MB) of parity-protected, extended data output (EDO) dynamic random-access memory (DRAM) on two, 60-nanosecond (ns), dual in-line memory modules (DIMMs); 64 MB of DRAM is the minimum shipping configuration. • 512 kilobytes (KB) of static random-access memory (SRAM) for secondary CPU cache memory functions (SRAM is not user configurable or field upgradeable). • • 512 KB of NVRAM (NVRAM is not user configurable or field upgradeable). • Air-temperature sensors for environmental monitoring. Most of the additional memory components used by the system, including onboard Flash memory (8-MB) and up to two PCMCIA-based Flash memory cards. The default GRP PCMCIA Flash memory is 20 megabytes (MB). The Cisco IOS software images that run the Cisco 12012 reside in Flash memory, which is located on the GRP in the form of a single in-line memory module (SIMM), and on up to two Personal Computer Memory Card International Association (PCMCIA) cards (called Flash memory cards) that insert in the two PCMCIA slots (slot 0 and slot 1) on the front of the GRP. (See Figure 1-2.) Storing the Cisco IOS images in Flash memory enables you to download and boot from upgraded Cisco IOS images remotely or from software images resident in GRP Flash memory. The Cisco 12012 supports downloadable system software for most Cisco IOS software upgrades, which enables you to remotely download, store, and boot from a new Cisco IOS image. 1-6 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Physical and Functional Overviews GRP Memory Components Table 1-1 lists the memory components on the GRP. Figure 1-3 shows the location of the DRAM and Flash SIMM on the GRP. Table 1-1 GRP Memory Components Type Size Quantity Description DRAM 641 1 or 2 64- or 128-MB DIMMs (based on DRAM required) for main Cisco IOS software functions. SRAM 512 KB (fixed)2 SRAM for secondary CPU cache memory functions. NVRAM 512 KB (fixed)3 Nonvolatile random-access memory for the system configuration file. Flash Memory (SIMM)4 8 MB 1 Contains Cisco IOS software images and other user-defined files on the GRP. Flash Memory (card) 20 MB5 Up to 2 Contains Cisco IOS software images and other user-defined files on up to two PCMCIA-based Flash memory cards.6 Flash boot ROM 512 KB 1 Flash EPROM for the ROM monitor program boot image. to 256 MB 1. 64 MB of DRAM is the default DRAM configuration for the GRP. 2. SRAM is not user configurable or field upgradeable. 3. NVRAM is not user configurable or field upgradeable. 4. SIMM socket is wired for Cisco’s own design and does not accept industry-standard 80-pin Flash SIMMs. 5. 20-MB Flash memory card is the default shipping configuration for the Cisco 12012. 6. Type 1 or Type 2 PCMCIA cards can be used in either PCMCIA slot. Product Overview 1-7 Physical and Functional Overviews Figure 1-3 GRP (Horizontal Orientation Shown) Backplane connector U42 Bank 2 DRAM DIMMs Bank 1 U39 Flash SIMM EJ EC T -1 OT SL -0 OT SL RE SE CO T X AU LIN PCMCIA slots slot 0: bottom slot 1: top K Auxiliary port Console port 1-8 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide TX LL RJ RX M II H10547 U17 5 -4 GIGABIT ROUTE PROCESSOR Alphanumeric LED displays Ethernet interface (RJ-45 or MII) Physical and Functional Overviews DRAM The extended data output (EDO) dynamic random-access memory (DRAM) on the GRP stores routing tables, protocols, and network accounting applications, and runs the Cisco IOS software. The standard (default) GRP DRAM configuration is 64 megabytes (MB) of EDO DRAM, which you can increase up to 256 MB through DRAM upgrades. The Cisco IOS software runs from within GRP DRAM. Table 1-2 lists the DRAM configurations and upgrades. Table 1-2 Total DRAM DRAM Configurations Product Numbers DRAM Sockets Number of DIMMs MB1 MEM-GRP/LC-64(=) U39 (bank 1) 1 64-MB DIMM 128 MB MEM-GRP/LC-64(=) U39 (bank 1) and U42 (bank 2) 2 64-MB DIMMs 64 128 MB MEM-GRP/LC-128(=) U39 (bank 1) 1 128-MB DIMM 256 MB MEM-GRP/LC-256(=) U39 (bank 1) and U42 (bank 2) 2 128-MB DIMMs 1. 64-MB is the standard (default) DRAM configuration for the GRP. To prevent memory problems, DRAM DIMMs must be 3.3-volt (V), 60-nanosecond (ns) devices. Do not attempt to install other devices in the DIMM sockets. Caution SRAM SRAM provides secondary CPU cache memory. The standard GRP configuration is 512 KB. Its principle function is to act as a staging area for routing tables update information to and from the line cards. SRAM is not user configurable or field-upgradeable. Product Overview 1-9 Physical and Functional Overviews NVRAM The system configuration, software configuration register settings, and environmental monitoring logs are contained in the 512-KB NVRAM, which is backed up with built-in lithium batteries that retain the contents for a minimum of five years. NVRAM is not user configurable or field-upgradeable. Before you replace the GRP in the system, back up the running configuration to a Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) file server or an installed Flash memory card so you can retrieve it later. If the configuration is not saved, the entire configuration will be lost—inside the NVRAM on the removed GRP—and you will have to reenter the entire configuration manually. This procedure is not necessary if you are temporarily removing a GRP; lithium batteries retain the configuration in memory until you replace the GRP in the system. Caution Flash Memory Both the onboard and PCMCIA card-based Flash memory allow you to remotely load and store multiple Cisco IOS software and microcode images. You can download a new image over the network or from a local server and then add the new image to Flash memory or replace the existing files. You can then boot the routers either manually or automatically from any of the stored images. Flash memory also functions as a TFTP server to allow other servers to boot remotely from stored images or to copy them into their own Flash memory. System Status LEDs This section describes the two types of system status LEDs used on the GRP: LED indicators and alphanumeric LED displays. • The GRP has the following eight LED indicators: — Two PCMCIA activity LEDs (one per PCMCIA slot): these LEDs light when the slot is accessed. The LEDs receive power from the switched slot voltage. — Four RJ-45 Ethernet port LEDs: these LEDs are used in conjunction with the RJ-45 Ethernet connector. When the MII Ethernet port is in use, the LEDs are disabled. The LEDs indicate link activity, collision detection, data transmission, and data reception. 1-10 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Physical and Functional Overviews — Two RJ-45 or MII Ethernet port select LEDs: these LEDs, when on, identify which one of the two Ethernet connections you selected. When the RJ-45 port is selected, its LED is on and the MII LED is off. When the MII port is selected, its LED is on and the RJ-45 LED is off. • The alphanumeric displays are organized as two rows of four characters each. The displays’ content is controlled by the MBus module software. The displays’ content is controlled by the GRP’s MBus module software. Both rows of the display are powered by the MBus module. These alphanumeric displays provide information about the following: — System status messages that are displayed during the boot process — System status messages that are displayed after the boot process is complete During the boot process, the alphanumeric LED displays are controlled directly by the MBus. After the boot process, they are controlled by the Cisco IOS software (via the MBus), and display messages designated by the Cisco IOS software. The following levels of system operation are displayed: — Status of the GRP — System error messages — User-defined status/error messages Note A complete, descriptive list of all system and error messages is located in the Cisco IOS System Error Messages publications. Soft Reset Switch A soft reset switch provides a reset to the R5000's software on the GRP. Access to the soft reset switch is through a small opening in the GRP faceplate. To depress the switch, you must insert a paperclip or similar sharp pointed object into the opening. To prevent system problems or loss of data, use the soft reset switch only at the advice of Cisco service personnel. Caution Product Overview 1-11 Physical and Functional Overviews PCMCIA Slots The GRP has two PCMCIA slots available. Either slot can support a Flash memory card or an input/output (I/O) device as long as the device requires only +5 VDC. The GRP supports Type 1 and Type 2 devices; it does not support +3.3 VDC PCMCIA devices. Each PCMCIA slot has an ejector button for ejecting a PCMCIA card from the slot. Asynchronous Serial Ports Two asynchronous serial ports on the GRP, the console and auxiliary ports, allow you to connect external devices to monitor and manage the system. The console port is an Electronics Industries Association/Telecommunications Industry Association (EIA/TIA)-232 receptacle (female) that provides a data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE) interface for connecting a console terminal. Note EIA/TIA-232 was known as recommended standard RS-232 before its acceptance as a standard by the Electronic Industries Association (EIA) and Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA). The auxiliary port is an EIA/TIA-232 plug (male) that provides a data terminal equipment (DTE) interface; the auxiliary port supports flow control and is often used to connect a modem, a channel service unit (CSU), or other optional equipment for Telnet management. Ethernet Port The GRP has one Ethernet port available, using one of the following two connection types: • RJ-45 receptacle: an 8-pin media dependent interface (MDI) RJ-45 receptacle for either IEEE 802.3 10BaseT (10 Mbps) or IEEE 802.3u 100BaseTX (100 Mbps) Ethernet connections. • MII receptacle: a 40-pin media independent interface (MII) receptacle that provides additional flexibility in Ethernet connections. The pinout of this standard 40-pin receptacle is defined by the IEEE 802.3u standard. 1-12 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Physical and Functional Overviews Note The RJ-45 and MII receptacles on the GRP represent two physical connection options for one Ethernet interface; therefore, you can use either the MDI RJ-45 connection or the MII connection, but not both simultaneously. Performance Route Processor Each Cisco 12012 GSR has one main system (or route) processor. The route processor (RP) processes the network routing protocols and distributes updates to the Cisco Express Forwarding (CEF) tables on the line cards. The RP also performs general maintenance functions, such as diagnostics, console support, and line card monitoring. Two types of RPs are available for the Cisco 12012 GSR: • • Gigabit Route Processor (GRP) Performance Route Processor (PRP) When not explicitly specified, this document uses the term route processor (RP) to indicate either the GRP or the PRP. Note If you install a second, redundant RP, it must be of the same type as the primary RP. The section describes the Performance Route Processor (PRP) and includes the following information: • • • • • • PRP Memory Components System Status LEDs Soft Reset Switch PCMCIA Slots Asynchronous Serial Ports Ethernet Port If you have a GRP, see the “Gigabit Route Processor” section. Product Overview 1-13 Physical and Functional Overviews Figure 1-2 shows the front panel view of the PRP. Performance Route Processor (Front Panel View, Horizontal Orientation Shown) ETH 1 AUX PERFORMANCE ROUTE PROCESSOR 1 (PRP-1) 75041 PRIMARY TX EN TX RX CONSOLE T SE RE PRIMARY LIN K EN RX SL SL OT OT -0 -1 EJ EC T ETH 0 LIN K Figure 1-4 The PRP is available as Product Number PRP-1=, which includes one PRP with 512 MB of synchronous dynamic random-access memory (SDRAM) and one 64-MB advanced technology attachment (ATA) Flash disk. The primary functions of the PRP are as follows: • • • • Downloading the Cisco IOS software to all of the installed line cards at power up • • • • Running routing protocols Providing a console (terminal) port for router configuration Providing an auxiliary port for other external equipment (such as modems) Providing two IEEE 802.3, 10/100-megabits-per-second (Mbps) Ethernet ports for Telnet functionality Building and distributing routing tables to line cards Providing general system maintenance functions Communicating with line cards either through the switch fabric or through the maintenance bus (MBus) The MBus connection allows the PRP to download a system bootstrap image, collect or load diagnostic information, and perform general, internal system maintenance operations. The switch fabric connection is the main data path for routing table distribution as well as for packets that are sent between line cards and the PRP. 1-14 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Physical and Functional Overviews The PRP contains the following components: • Motorola PowerPC 7450 central processing unit (CPU). The CPU runs at an external bus clock speed of 133 MHz and an internal clock speed of 667 MHz. • Up to 2 GB of SDRAM on two PC133-compliant, dual in-line memory modules (DIMMs). 512 MB of SDRAM is the default shipping configuration. SDRAM is field replaceable. • Two MB of SRAM for secondary CPU cache memory functions. SRAM is not user configurable or field replaceable. • • Two MB of NVRAM. NVRAM is not user configurable or field replaceable. • Air-temperature sensors for environmental monitoring. Additional memory components used by the system, including onboard Flash memory and up to two Flash memory cards. The Cisco IOS software images that run the Cisco 12000 series Internet Router system are stored in Flash memory. Two types of Flash memory ship with the PRP: 1 Onboard Flash memory — Ships as a single in-line memory module (SIMM). This Flash memory contains the Cisco IOS boot image (bootflash) and is not field replaceable. 2 Flash disk— The PRP ships with a Flash disk that can be installed in either Flash disk slot. (See Figure 1-5.) The Flash disk contains the Cisco IOS software image. Storing the Cisco IOS images in Flash memory enables you to download and boot from upgraded Cisco IOS software images remotely, or from software images that reside in PRP Flash memory. Cisco 12000 series Internet Routers support downloadable system software for most Cisco IOS software upgrades. This enables you to remotely download, store, and boot from a new Cisco IOS software image. The Cisco IOS software runs from within the PRPs SDRAM. Figure 1-5 shows the locations of the various hardware components on the PRP. Product Overview 1-15 Physical and Functional Overviews Figure 1-5 PRP (Horizontal Orientation) 1 3 2 EC T ETH 0 LIN K EN PRIMARY LIN CONSOLE TX T SE RE 5 AUX RX RX TX EN PRIMARY 4 ETH 1 -1 OT SL -0 OT SL K 6 1-16 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide 7 8 PERFORMANCE ROUTE PROCESSOR 1 (PRP-1) 9 10 75042 EJ Physical and Functional Overviews 1 2 Backplane connector Flash SIMM (Socket number P3) 6 7 3 SDRAM DIMMs Bank 1 - Socket number U15 Bank 2 - Socket number U18 8 4 5 Ejector lever Flash disk slots (covered) 9 Handle 10 Display LEDs Ethernet ports Auxiliary port Console port PRP Memory Components Table 1-3 lists the memory components on the PRP. Table 1-3 Type PRP Memory Components Size Quantity Description SDRAM 512 MB, 1 GB, or 2 GB 1 or 2 512-MB and 1-GB DIMMs (based on desired SDRAM configuration) for main Cisco IOS software functions SRAM2 2 MB (fixed) — Secondary CPU cache memory functions NVRAM3 2 MB (fixed) 1 System configuration files, register settings, and logs 64 MB SIMM 1 Cisco IOS boot image (bootflash), crash information, and other user-defined files Flash disks5 1 or 2 Cisco IOS software images, system configuration files, and other user-defined files on up to two Flash disks 512 KB 1 Flash EPROM for the ROM monitor program boot image 1 Flash memory Flash boot ROM 4 1. Default SDRAM configuration is 512 MB. Bank 1 (U15) must be populated first. You can use one or both banks to configure SDRAM combinations of 512 MB, 1 GB, or 2 GB. 1.5-GB configurations are not supported. 2. SRAM is not user configurable or field replaceable. 3. NVRAM is not user configurable or field replaceable. 4. Flash memory SIMM is not user configurable or field replaceable. 5. ATA Flash disks and Type I and Type II linear Flash memory cards are supported. See the “Flash Memory” section on page -19 for Flash disk information. Product Overview 1-17 Physical and Functional Overviews Note If a single DIMM module is installed, it must be placed in bank 1 (U15). SDRAM SDRAM stores routing tables, protocols, and network accounting applications, and runs the Cisco IOS software. The default PRP configuration includes 512 MB of error checking and correction (ECC) SDRAM. DIMM upgrades of 512 MB and 1 GB are available. You cannot mix memory sizes. If two DIMMS are installed, they must be the same memory size. 1-18 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Physical and Functional Overviews Caution Cisco Systems strongly recommends that you use only Cisco-approved memory. To prevent memory problems, SDRAM DIMMs must be +3.3VDC, PC133-compliant devices. Do not attempt to install other devices in the DIMM sockets. SRAM SRAM provides 2 MB of parity-protected, secondary CPU cache memory. Its principal function is to act as a staging area for routing table updates and for information sent to and received from line cards. SRAM is not user configurable and cannot be upgraded in the field. NVRAM NVRAM provides 2 MB of memory for system configuration files, software configuration register settings, and environmental monitoring logs. This information is backed up with built-in lithium batteries that retain the contents for a minimum of 5 years. NVRAM is not user configurable and cannot be upgraded in the field. Flash Memory Flash memory allows you to remotely load and store multiple Cisco IOS software and microcode images. You can download a new image over the network or from a local server and then add the new image to Flash memory or replace the existing files. You then can boot the routers either manually or automatically from any of the stored images. Flash memory also functions as a Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server to allow other servers to boot remotely from stored images or to copy them into their own Flash memory. The onboard Flash memory (called bootflash) contains the Cisco IOS boot image, and the Flash disk contains the Cisco IOS software image. A 64-MB ATA Flash disk ships by default with the PRP. Table 1-4 lists the supported Flash disk sizes and their Cisco product numbers. Table 1-4 Supported Flash Disk Sizes and Product Numbers Flash Disk Size1 64 MB2 Product Number MEM-12KRP-FD64= Product Overview 1-19 Physical and Functional Overviews Flash Disk Size1 Product Number 128 MB MEM-12KRP-FD128= 1 GB MEM-12KRP-FD1G= 1. Standard Type 1 and Type 2 linear Flash memory cards also are supported, although they may not have the capacity to meet the requirements of your configuration. 2. 64-MB ATA Flash disk is the default shipping configuration. System Status LEDs The sections describes the two types of system status LEDs used on the PRP: LED indicators and alphanumeric LED displays. The device or port activity indicators consist of the following functional groups: • Two Flash disk activity LEDs (labeled SLOT-0 and SLOT-1)—1 LED per Flash disk slot: these go on when the slot is accessed. • Four RJ-45 Ethernet port LEDs (labeled LINK, EN, TX, and RX): used in conjunction with each of the RJ-45 Ethernet connectors. Each connector includes a set of 4 LEDs that indicate link activity (LINK), port enabled (EN), data transmission (TX), and data reception (RX). • Two Ethernet connection LEDs (labeled PRIMARY): these two LEDs, when on, identify which of the two Ethernet connections is selected. Since both ports are supported on the PRP, the LED on port ETH0 is always on. The ETH1 LED goes on when it is selected. The alphanumeric display LEDs are organized as two rows of four characters each and are located at one end of the card. These LEDs provide system status and error messages that are displayed during and after the boot process. The boot process and the content displayed are controlled by the PRPs MBus module software. At the end of the boot process, the LEDs are controlled by the Cisco IOS software (via the MBus), and the content displayed is designated by the Cisco IOS software. The alphanumeric display LEDs provide information about the following: • • Status of the PRP System error messages 1-20 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Physical and Functional Overviews • User-defined status and error messages Note A complete, descriptive list of all system and error messages is located in the Cisco IOS System Error Messages publications. Soft Reset Switch The soft reset switch causes a nonmaskable interrupt (NMI) and places the PRP in ROM monitor mode. When the PRP enters ROM monitor mode, its behavior depends on the setting of the PRP software configuration register. For example, when the boot field of the software configuration register is set to 0x0, and you press the NMI switch, the PRP remains at the ROM monitor prompt (rommon>) and waits for a user command to boot the system manually. But if the boot field is set to 0x1, the system automatically boots the first IOS image found in the onboard Flash memory SIMM on the PRP. Caution The soft reset (NMI) switch is not a mechanism for resetting the PRP and reloading the IOS image. It is intended for software development use. To prevent system problems or loss of data, use the soft reset switch only on the advice of Cisco service personnel. Access to the soft reset switch is through a small opening in the PRP faceplate. To press the switch, you must insert a paper clip or similar small pointed object into the opening. Flash Disk Slots The PRP includes two Flash disk (PCMCIA) slots. Either slot can support an ATA Flash disk or a Type 1 or Type 2 linear Flash memory card. The PRP ships by default with one 64-MB ATA Flash disk. Note The PRP only supports +5VDC Flash disk devices. It does not support +3.3VDC PCMCIA devices. Product Overview 1-21 Physical and Functional Overviews All combinations of different Flash devices are supported by the PRP. You can use ATA Flash disks, Type 1 or Type 2 linear Flash memory cards, or a combination of the two. Each Flash disk slot has an ejector button for ejecting a card from the slot. Note Type 1 and Type 2 linear Flash memory cards may not have the capacity to meet the requirements of your configuration. Asynchronous Serial Ports The PRP has two asynchronous serial ports, the console and auxiliary ports. These allow you to connect external serial devices to monitor and manage the system. Both ports use RJ-45 receptacles. The console port provides a data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE) interface for connecting a console terminal. The auxiliary port provides a data terminal equipment (DTE) interface and supports flow control. It is often used to connect a modem, a channel service unit (CSU), or other optional equipment for Telnet management. Ethernet Ports The PRP includes two Ethernet ports, both using an 8-pin RJ-45 receptacle for either IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T (10 Mbps) or IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX (100 Mbps) connections. Note The transmission speed of the Ethernet ports is auto-sensing by default and is user configurable. Line Cards The Cisco 12012 is shipped from the factory with up to 11 installed line cards that provide a variety of network media types (based on your order). The line cards are installed in slots 0 through 11 in the upper card cage and interface to each other and to the RP through the switch fabric (cards in the lower card cage). Vertical cable-management brackets attach to each line card to manage and organize the network interface cables. 1-22 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Physical and Functional Overviews Line cards installed in the Cisco 12012 support online insertion and removal (OIR), which means you can remove and replace a line card while the Cisco 12012 remains powered up. To ensure adequate airflow through the upper card cage, empty card slots must have a card blank installed. Caution Note Detailed instructions for removing, replacing, and configuring the line cards supported by the Cisco 12012 are contained in the configuration note for the individual line card. Alarm Card The alarm card occupies a special slot (rightmost slot) in the upper card cage. The slot is labeled Alarm card, is physically narrower, and has a different backplane connector than the rest of slots in the upper card cage. Product Overview 1-23 Physical and Functional Overviews The alarm card has three primary functions: • Provides a visual display of three severity levels of alarms (critical, major, and minor) detected by the system through the MBus. The alarms can warn of an overtemperature condition on a component in the card cage assembly, a fan failure in a blower module, an overcurrent condition in a power supply, or an out-of-tolerance voltage on one of the cards in the upper or lower card cage. The threshold levels for triggering the different stages of alarms are set by software. The RP continuously polls the system for temperature, voltage, current, and fan speed values. If a threshold value is detected, the RP sets the appropriate severity level of alarm on the alarm card lighting one of three pairs of LEDs and energizing the appropriate alarm card relays activating any external audible or visual alarms. • Provides a connection point for the system to connect to two site-wide external alarm systems. Two redundant, 25-pin D-sub connectors on the alarm card faceplate are tied directly to the critical, major, and minor alarm relay normally open, normally closed, and common contacts. Only safety extra-low voltage (SELV) external alarm circuits can be attached to the two alarm card connectors. The external alarm can be visual or audible. Audible external alarms can be reset by the reset switch on the alarm card faceplate. Visual alarms are reset by software. • Provides visual status of the clock and scheduler cards and the switch fabric cards. Five pairs of LEDs (one pair for each slot in the lower card cage) provide a visual status of the switch fabric. The alarm card faceplate contains the following connectors and indicators (see Figure 1-6): • Critical/Major/Minor LEDs—Three pairs of LEDs; two pairs are red, and one pair is amber. The LEDs are driven by MBus software. The LEDs give a visual indication of critical, major, and minor alarms detected by the system. The LEDs are paired for redundancy. • Audible alarm cutoff switch—A switch used to turn off an external audible alarm. It does not affect any visual (LED) alarms set on the alarm card. The audible alarm remains activated until the alarm condition is cleared or this button is pressed. • Alarm 1 and alarm 2 connectors—Two, 25-pin D-sub connectors. The alarm card relay contacts are tied to these two connectors. You can attach visual and audible alarm circuits to the alarm 1and alarm 2 connectors. 1-24 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Physical and Functional Overviews Note Only safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits can be connected to the alarm 1 and alarm 2 connectors. Maximum rating for the alarm circuit is 2 amps, 50 volt-amp. CSC/SFC LEDs—Five pairs of LEDs (one pair for each slot in the lower card cage) showing clock and scheduler card status and switch fabric card status. A green enabled LED indicates that the card in that slot has been detected by the system. A red fail LED indicates that the system has detected a fault in the card in that slot. Figure 1-6 Alarm Card Faceplate LEDs, Switches, and Connectors CS EN Critical, major, and minor alarm LEDs Pin 1 ALARM 1 CR CR IT IC AL JOR OR IN MA M IT IC AL JOR OR IN MA M O AC A IL FA D E BL SF 0 1 0 Pin 1 CS ALARM 2 /LT Pin 25 Audio alarm cutoff switch C EN Pin 25 AB IL FA D LE 0 C 1 SF 0 1 1 C 2 H10900 • C 2 ALARM Clock and scheduler card and switch fabric card LEDs Switch Fabric The heart of the Cisco 12012 is the switch fabric circuity, which provides synchronized gigabit speed interconnections for the line cards and the RP. The switch fabric circuitry is contained on two types of cards, a clock and scheduler card and a switch fabric card, which install in the five slots in the lower card cage. (See Figure 1-7.) A clock and scheduler card is installed in either slot 0 or slot 1 (CSC 0 or CSC 1) in the lower card cage; a switch fabric card is installed in slot 2, slot 3, or slot 4 (SFC 1, SFC 2, or SFC 3) in the lower card cage. Product Overview 1-25 Physical and Functional Overviews A system must have a one clock and scheduler card installed to operate. Both types of cards have a switching capacity of 15 Gbps. You can add switching capacity (up to 60 Gbps) and redundancy by increasing the number of switch cards (to a maximum of five cards) installed in your system. Figure 1-7 Lower Card Cage IL FA D LE AB EN 0 1 C CS 0 1 2 ALARM SFC OC-12/STM-4 POS Q OC-3/STM-POS OC-12/STM-4 ATM GIGABIT ROUTE PROCESSOR Lower card cage slot 0 H11017 Lower card cage slot 4 1-26 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Physical and Functional Overviews Each clock and scheduler card or switch fabric card provides OC-12/STM-4 (622 Mbps) switching bandwidth for the system. By adding three more cards in the lower card cage, the bandwidth is increased to OC-48/STM-16 (2.4 Gbps). Table 1-5 lists the switch fabric bandwidth and the card configurations needed to support the bandwidth. Table 1-5 Switch Fabric Configurations Switch Fabric Bandwidth Clock and Scheduler Card Switch Fabric Card OC-12/STM-4 11 0 OC-12/STM-4 redundant 2 0 OC-48/STM-16 1 3 OC-48/STM-16 redundant 2 3 1. One clock and scheduler card must be installed in a system. A minimally configured system has one clock and scheduler card installed. This configuration provides an OC-12/STM-4 bandwidth, but no switch fabric, clock, or scheduler redundancy. Adding a second clock and scheduler card provides fabric, clock, and scheduler redundancy, but no increase in bandwidth. Adding three switch fabric cards to a system with a single clock and scheduler card increases the system bandwidth to OC-48/STM-16, but no clock or scheduler redundancy. Adding a second clock and scheduler card to the system gives you OC-48/STM-16 bandwidth plus fabric, clock, and scheduler redundancy. The clock and scheduler card contains the following functionality: • System clock—Sent to all line cards, RP, and switch fabric cards. The system clock synchronizes data transfers between line cards or line cards and the RP through the switch fabric. In systems with redundant clock and scheduler cards, the two system clocks are synchronized so that if one system clock fails, the other clock takes over. • Scheduler—Handles requests from the line cards for access to the switch fabric. When the scheduler receives a request from a line card for switch fabric access, the scheduler determines when to allow the line card access to the switch fabric. Product Overview 1-27 Physical and Functional Overviews • Switch fabric—Circuitry that carries the user traffic between line cards or between the RP and a line card. The switch fabric on the clock and scheduler card is identical to the switch fabric on the switch fabric card. The switch fabric card contains only the switch fabric circuitry, which carries user traffic between line cards or between the RP and the line cards. The switch fabric card receives scheduling information and the system clock from the clock and scheduler card. The switch card is keyed to occupy slots 2, 3, and 4 (lower three slots) in the lower card cage. A minimally configured Cisco 12012 does not require a switch fabric card; however, to maximize the bandwidth and switching capacity of the Cisco 12012, three switch fabric cards must be installed. Status of the cards in the lower card cage is displayed by five pairs of LEDs (one pair for each card slot) on the alarm card in the upper card cage. Each pair of LEDs includes a green enable LED, which indicates the clock and scheduler card (CSC) or switch fabric card (SFC) is installed and operational, and a red fail LED, which indicates a fault has been detected on the card installed in that slot. Power Supplies The power supply bay, located at the bottom of the card cage assembly, can accommodate up to four AC-input power supplies or two dual-width DC-input power supplies. Do not mix power supplies in the Cisco 12012. In multiple power supply system configurations, all power supplies must be of the same type (four AC-input power supplies or two DC-input power supplies). Caution Note Detailed instructions for handling and replacing the Cisco 12012 power supplies are contained in the configuration notes Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router AC-Input Power Supply Replacement Instructions (Document Number 78-4334-xx) and Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router DC-Input power Supply Replacement Instructions (Document Number 78-4330-xx). The appropriate configuration note accompanies each AC-input or DC-input power supply that is shipped from the factory as a FRU. 1-28 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Physical and Functional Overviews AC-Input Power Supply The AC-input power supply is a modular unit that measures 10 inches (25.4 cm) by 3.8 inches (9.6 cm) wide by 15 inches (38 cm) deep and weighs 18 lb (8.2 kg). (See Figure 1-8.) The Cisco 12012 requires two AC-input power supplies to operate. Installing one or two additional AC-input power supplies provides power supply redundancy and current sharing capability. Warning AC operation requires a minimum configuration of two AC-input power supplies. An AC-input power supply has the following features: • A power factor corrector (PFC). Allows the power supply to accept source AC voltages from 180 to 264 VAC, single phase, 47 to 63 Hz. Each AC-input power supply requires a dedicated 20A service, North America; 10A or 16A, International. • • A handle. Provides a grip point for removing and replacing the power supply. • A power supply power cord appliance coupler. The main disconnect for the system. The power supply power switch engages a latch that secures the power supply in the power supply bay. • Two LEDs on the power supply faceplate. Indicate the following: A captive screw at the bottom of the faceplate. Secures the power supply in the power supply bay. — A green AC OK LED indicates that the source AC voltage is within the operational range of 200 to 264 VAC. The LED is on any time the power supply is connected to source AC and the power supply power switch is on. If the LED is off, a problem might be indicated. — A red output fail LED indicates that one or both of the power supply output voltages (+5 and –48 VDC) is out of tolerance. The LED flashes on and off for five seconds as a test of the LED when you first turn on the power supply. Product Overview 1-29 Physical and Functional Overviews • An AC power cord receptacle, located to the left of the handle. A modular 14-ft (4.3-m) power cable connects the AC-input power supply to the site AC power source. AC power cords with different source AC power plugs are available. A spring clip secures the power cable to the AC-input power supply. Connect each AC-input power supply to a separate AC power source. Note We recommend you install an uninterruptable power source (UPS) as a safeguard against power loss. Figure 1-8 AC-Input Power Supply AC receptacle ~ H10484 INPUT: 200 - 240V 10 A 50/60 HZ 2000 W Spring clip Handle AC OK LED Output fail LED AC OK OUTPUT FAIL Power switch Captive screw DC-Input power Supply The DC-input power supply is a modular unit that measures 10 inches high (25.4 cm), 7.84 inches (19.9 cm) wide (twice as wide as the AC-input power supply), 15 inches (38.1 cm) deep, and weighs 19 lb (8.6 kg). The Cisco 12012 requires one DC-input power supply. Adding a second DC-input power supply provides redundancy. 1-30 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Physical and Functional Overviews The DC-input power supply has the following features (see Figure 1-9): • Operates from a DC source voltage of –40.5 to –75 VDC and requires a dedicated 60A service. • • A handle. Provides a grip point for removing and replacing the power supply. • A power switch. Turns the power supply on and off and controls a latch that secures the power supply in the power supply bay. Turning the power switch on (|) engages the latch; turning the power switch off (O) releases the latch. • Two LEDs on the power supply faceplate. The LEDs indicate the following: A captive jackscrew. Seats and unseats the power supply in the backplane power supply connector and secures the power supply to the power supply bay. — A green input OK LED indicates that the source DC voltage is within the operational range of –40.5 to –75 VDC. The LED is on anytime the power supply is connected to source DC and the power supply power switch is on. — A red output fail LED indicates that one or both of the power supply output voltages (+5 and –48 VDC) is out of tolerance. The LED will flash on and off for five seconds as a test of the LED when the power supply is first turned on. • Six threaded terminals—two each for negative (source DC), positive (source DC return), and ground. A hardwired source DC power cable is required from the site DC power source to the DC-input power supply. The DC power cable leads should be 4 American Wiring Gauge (AWG) high strand count wire. The lugs for connecting power cable leads to the power supply should be dual-hole, M6 terminal lugs with .625-inch (15.86-mm) centers. • An external circuit breaker alarm. Indicates when a DC-input power supply circuit breaker has tripped. A terminal block with three connectors is mounted on the left side of the power supply for this external alarm. Product Overview 1-31 Physical and Functional Overviews Figure 1-9 DC-Input Power Supply H10485 Source DC terminals Circuit breaker alarm terminal block Handle Input OK LED Power switch Captive jackscrew Output fail LED DC power cable bracket To ensure adequate airflow across the router’s power supplies, a power supply or a power supply blank must be installed in each power supply bay. Caution Power Distribution The backplane distributes power in the Cisco 12012 through the backplane to all cards in the upper and lower card cages and to the two blower modules through two harnesses. (See Figure 1-10.) The power supplies convert either source AC or source DC into +5 VDC and -48 VDC. The +5 VDC goes directly to each card to power the MBus module. The –48 VDC feeds a DC-DC converter also on each card. The MBus module controls the DC-DC converter. When directed by the RP or by MBus software, the MBus module turns on the DC-DC converter; the –48 VDC is converted into +3.3 VDC and +5 VDC for use by the card. Power for the blower modules is supplied directly from the backplane through two harnesses mounted on the frame. An internal blower module controller card converts –48 VDC into a variable DC voltage which powers the blower module fans. An increase in the system ambient air temperature increases the voltage to the fans, increasing their speed. 1-32 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Physical and Functional Overviews Figure 1-10 Cisco 12012 Power Distribution DC/DC conv. Blower module Controller card +5 VDC +3.3 VDC MBus module MBus module GRP DC/DC conv. Blower module Controller card –48 VDC MBus module +5 VDC +5 VDC +3.3 VDC MBus module Line card –48 VDC DC/DC conv. –48 VDC +3.3 VDC MBus module Switch fabric card –48 VDC +5 VDC +5 VDC H10506 Backplane –48 VDC Alarm card +5 VDC 185–264 VAC –48/–60 VDC AC-input or DC-input power supply Minimum 2 AC-input power supplies or 1 DC-input power supply Maximum 4 AC-input power supplies or 2 DC-input power supply Product Overview 1-33 Physical and Functional Overviews Blower Module The Cisco 12012 has two blower modules; one is located above the upper card cage, and the second is located below the power supply bay. (See Figure 1-1.) The two blower modules maintain acceptable operating temperatures for the internal components by drawing cooling air through both card cages and the power supply bay. The blower module is a sheet metal enclosure containing three fans, a fan controller card, and two faceplate LEDs. (See Figure 1-11.) The top and bottom blower modules are identical and are interchangeable. Both blower modules have snap-on plastic front covers mounted over the blower module faceplates. Two blower module LEDs are visible through the front covers. Figure 1-11 Blower Module (Shown without the Blower Module Front Cover) Snap fasteners (4 places) LEDs H10486 Blower module Captive screws The blower modules draw room air in through an air filter on the front of the lower card cage (See Figure 1-12). The top blower module draws the air up through the upper card cage and out through exhaust vents on the back of the blower module; the bottom blower module draws the air down through the lower card cage and power supply bay and out through exhaust vents on the back of the blower module. 1-34 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Physical and Functional Overviews The front and back of the Cisco 12012 must remain unobstructed to ensure adequate air flow and prevent overheating inside the card cage assembly; we recommend at least 6 inches (15.2 cm) of clearance. Figure 1-12 Internal Air Flow (Side View) Air exhaust Top blower module Upper card cage Air filter Air deflector Room air Lower card cage Bottom blower module Front Air exhaust Rear H10487 Power supply bay Product Overview 1-35 Physical and Functional Overviews A blower module controller card in the blower module monitors and controls the operation of the three variable-speed fans. The variable-speed feature enables quieter operation by allowing the blower modules to operate at less than maximum speed when doing so provides adequate cooling to maintain an acceptable operating temperature inside the card cage assembly. Temperature sensors (two per card) monitor the internal air temperature. When the ambient air temperature is within normal operating range, the fans operate at their lowest speed, which is 55 percent of the maximum speed. If the air temperature inside the card cage assembly rises, fan speed increases to provide additional cooling air to the internal components. If the internal air temperatures continue to rise beyond the specified threshold, the system environmental monitor shuts down all internal power to prevent equipment damage from excessive heat. If the system detects that one of three fans within a blower module has failed, it displays a warning message on the console screen. In addition, the two remaining fans go to full speed to compensate for the loss of the one fan. If another fan fails, the system shut downs to prevent equipment damage. A handle on the blower module provides a grip point for removing and replacing a blower module. (See Figure 1-11.) Two LEDs (one green and one red), visible through the blower module front cover, provide blower module status. The green LED, when on, indicates all three fans are operating normally. The red LED should remain off during normal operation. If the red LED is on, a fan failure or other fault has been detected in the blower module. The fault can be one or more stopped fans or one or more fans running below speed, or the controller card has a fault. Note The configuration note Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Blower Module Replacement Instructions (Document Number 78-4335-xx) contains detailed instructions for removing and replacing a blower module. This configuration note accompanies every blower module that is shipped from the factory as a FRU. 1-36 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Physical and Functional Overviews Air Filter The Cisco 12012 is equipped with a serviceable air filter mounted in a hinged tray located in front of the lower card cage. Do not run the Cisco 12012 without an air filter installed. You should inspect and clean the air filter once a month (more often in dusty environments). Procedures for vacuuming and replacing the air filter are contained in the section “Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filter Assembly” in the chapter “Maintaining the Cisco 12012.” Cable-Management System The Cisco 12012 cable-management system organizes the interface cables entering and exiting the system, keeping them free of sharp bends (excessive bending in an interface cable can cause performance degradation) and out of the way. The Cisco 12012 cable-management system consists of two components: a horizontal cable-management tray attached to the frame above the upper card cage, and vertical cable-management brackets, one bracket per line card. (See Figure 1-13.) The horizontal cable-management tray keeps all of the interface cables organized as the cables enter the Cisco 12012 from either the left or right side, and directs them down through the bottom of the tray to the individual line cards. A vertical cable-management bracket attaches to each line card with two captive screws. Rubber clips on the bracket hold the interface cables in place, keeping the cables organized. On line cards with multiple ports, the vertical cable-management bracket keeps the interface cables organized when you remove and replace the line card. You can unplug the interface cables from the line card and keep cables clipped in the vertical cable-management bracket while you remove the bracket from the line card. Then, when you replace the line card, the interface cables are already broken out to the correct line card interface connectors. Product Overview 1-37 0 Cable-Management System Figure 1-13 T-1 SLO 0 TSLO 1 0 0 X AU T SE RE 2 T O/L AC R E IE KT TIV RR P AC CA RX ALARM 1 3 TX LL CO RX R E IE KT TIV RR P AC CA RX K LIN MII ALARM 2 45 RJ- 0 1 C CS 0 1 ALARM 2 C SF 1-38 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide IL FA D LE AB EN OC-12/STM-4 POS OC-12/STM-4 ATM Q OC-3/STM-POS GIGABIT ROUTE PROCESSOR Vertical cable-management bracket AL JOR OR IC IT MA MIN CR R E IE ELL TIV RR C AC CA RX R E IE ELL TIV RR C AC CA RX R E IE KT TIV RR P AC CA RX OLE NS CO Line card Captive screw R E IE KT TIV RR P AC CA RX CT EJE H10733 Physical and Functional Overviews Horizontal cable-management tray Captive screw Physical and Functional Overviews Maintenance Bus The Cisco 12012 maintenance bus (MBus) and MBus modules manage all of the maintenance functions of the system. The Cisco 12012 MBus consists of two separate busses (providing MBus redundancy) that link all of the line cards, the RP, the switch fabric cards, the power supplies, and the blower modules. Each component contains an MBus module that allows the component to communicate over the MBus. The MBus module on each component is powered by +5 VDC directly from the power supply. The MBus modules perform the following functions: • Power-up/down control—Each MBus module directly controls the DC-DC converters on the component it is mounted on based on commands it receives from its on-board EPROM and from the master RP. Each MBus module is tied directly to +5 VDC from the power supply. When power is applied to the Cisco 12012, all MBus modules immediately power up. The MBus modules on the RP or clock and scheduler card immediately turn on the DC-DC converter, powering up the respective card. The line card MBus module waits to power up the line card until it receives a command from the master RP. • Device discovery—The RP can determine the system configuration using the MBus. A message is sent from the RP over the MBus requesting all installed devices to identify themselves. The response back provides slot number and card and component type. • Code download—A portion of the line card operating software can be downloaded from the RP to the line card over the MBus. Because the MBus is relatively slow compared to the switch fabric, only enough code is downloaded to the line card for it to access the switch fabric and complete the download process. • Diagnostics—The diagnostic software image is downloaded from the RP to the card under test. Product Overview 1-39 System Specifications • Environmental monitoring and alarms—The MBus module on each component monitors that component’s environment as follows: — Line cards and the RP are monitored for temperature by two temperature sensors mounted on each card. The MBus module makes voltage adjustments through software for the +3.3- and +5-VDC DC-DC converters. — Clock and scheduler cards and switch fabric cards are monitored for temperature by two temperature sensors mounted on each card. The MBus module makes voltage adjustments through software for the +3.3- and +5-VDC DC-DC converters — Environmental monitoring includes voltage monitoring, temperature monitoring from two temperature sensors, and rotational speed sensing for each blower module fan. System Specifications This section lists the Cisco 12012 specifications. The specifications are listed in three tables: Table 1-6 lists the physical specifications, Table 1-7 lists the electrical specifications, and Table 1-8 lists the environmental specifications. Table 1-6 Cisco 12012 Physical Specifications Description Value Frame height 57 inches (144.8 cm) Frame width 17.4 inches (44.2 cm) 19.375 inches (49.2 cm) including flanges Frame depth 21 inches (53.3 cm) including cable- management system Weight: Maximum configuration Minimum configuration Shipping 380 lb (172.4 kg) 250 lb (113.6 kg) 460 lb (208.6 kg) 1-40 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide System Specifications Table 1-7 Cisco 12012 Electrical Specifications Description Value AC-input power 1560 watts AC-input voltage 200–240 VAC nominal (single-phase) AC-input current rating 9.5 amps (@ 200 VAC) DC-input power 3000 watts DC-input voltage –48 VDC nominal in North America –60 VDC nominal in the European Community DC-input current rating 55 amps (A) @ 50 VDC Table 1-8 Cisco 12012 Environmental Specifications Description Value Temperature 32° to 104°F (0 to 40°C) operating –4° to 149°F (–20 to 65°C) nonoperating Humidity 10 to 90% noncondensing operating 5 to 95% noncondensing nonoperating Altitude 0 to 10,000 ft (0 to 3,050 m) operating 0 to 30,000 ft (0 to 9,144 m) nonoperating Heat dissipation 10,640 Btu/hr maximum Acoustic Noise 69 dbA maximum Shock 5 to 500 Hz, 0.5g1 (0.1 oct./min.2) operating 5 to 100 Hz, 1g (0.1 oct./min.) nonoperating 100 to 500 Hz, 1.5g (0.2 oct./min.) 500 to 1,000 Hz, 1.5g (0.2 oct./min.) 1. g = gravity. 2. oct./min. = octave per minute. Product Overview 1-41 Agency Approvals Agency Approvals In addition to meeting GR-63-CORE and GR-1089-CORE specifications, the Cisco 12012 meets the agency approvals for safety, EMI, and immunity listed in Table 1-9. Table 1-9 Agency Approvals Category Agency Approval Safety UL 1950 CSA 22.2 No. 950 EN60950 AUSTEL TS001 AS/NZS 3260 EMI FCC Class A CSA Class A EN55022 Class A VCCI Class 1 AS/NRZ 3548 Class A Immunity EN61000-4-2/IEC-1000-4-2 EN61000-4-3/IEC-1000-4-3 EN61000-4-4/IEC-1000-4-4 EN61000-4-5/IEC-1000-4-5 EN61000-4-6/IEC-1000-4-6 EN61000-4-11/IEC-1000-4-11 1-42 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide CHAPTER 2 Preparing for Installation This chapter provides specific information about preparing your site for the Cisco 12012. Included are safety guidelines, specific preparatory information, and tools and parts required to assure a successful installation of your Cisco 12012. The shipping package for Cisco 12000 series routers is engineered to reduce the potential of product damage associated with routine material handling experienced during shipment. To minimize potential damage to the product, transport these products in their Cisco-specified packagings. Failure to do so may result in damage to the router or degradation of its performance. Also, do not remove the GSR or Internet Router from its shipping container until you are ready to install it. The router should always be transported or stored in an upright position. Keep the router in the shipping container until you have determined where you will install it. Use the unpacking documentation included with the router when you unpack the Cisco 12012. Inspect all items for shipping damage. If anything is damaged, immediately contact a customer service representative. Sections in this chapter include the following: • • • • • Safety Recommendations Site Requirement Guidelines Tools for Installation Unpacking the Cisco 12012 Site Log Preparing for Installation 2-1 Safety Recommendations Before installing your Cisco 12012, you should consider power and cabling requirements that must be in place at your installation site, the equipment you will need to install the router, and the environmental conditions your installation site must meet to maintain normal operation. This chapter guides you through the process of preparing for your router installation. Safety Recommendations The following guidelines will help to ensure your safety and protect the equipment. This list is not inclusive of all potentially hazardous situations, so be alert. • • Never attempt to lift an object that might be too heavy for you to lift by yourself. • • • Keep the work area clear and dust free during and after installation. • The Cisco 12012 operates safely when it is used in accordance with its marked electrical ratings and product usage instructions. • • Do not work alone if potentially hazardous conditions exist. • Review the safety warnings listed in the document Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for the Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router (Document Number 78-4347-xx) that accompanied your Cisco 12012 before installing, configuring, or maintaining the router. Always disconnect the power source and unplug all power cables before working on the router. Keep tools and router components away from walk areas. Do not wear loose clothing, jewelry (including rings and chains), or other items that could get caught in the router. Fasten your tie or scarf and sleeves. The installation of your Cisco 12012 should be in compliance with national and local electrical codes: in the United States, National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70, United States National Electrical Code; in Canada, Canadian Electrical Code, part I, CSA C22.1; in other countries, International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 364, part 1 through part 7. 2-2 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Safety Recommendations • Cisco 12012 routers with AC-input power supplies are shipped with a three-wire electrical grounding-type plug that will only fit into a grounding-type power outlet. This is a safety feature. The equipment grounding should be in accordance with local and national electrical codes. • Cisco 12012 routers configured with DC-input power supplies require a 60-ampere DC circuit breaker for the input DC power source. This circuit breaker should protect against short-circuit and overcurrent faults in accordance with United States National Electrical Code NFPA 70 (United States), Canadian Electrical Code, part I, CSA C22.1 (Canada) and IEC 364 (other countries). • Only a DC power source that complies with the safety extra-low voltage (SELV) requirements in UL950, CSA 950, EN 60950, and IEC950 can be connected to a Cisco 12012 DC-input power supply. • A Cisco 12012 configured with DC-input power supplies is to be installed in a restricted access area in accordance with Articles 110-16, 110-17, and 110-18 of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA 70. • A Cisco 12012 configured with DC-input power supplies shall have a readily accessible disconnect device incorporated in the fixed wiring. Lifting Guidelines A fully configured Cisco 12012 weighs approximately 380 lb (172 kg); it is not intended to be moved frequently. Before you install the router, ensure that your site is properly prepared so you can avoid having to move the Cisco 12012 later to accommodate power sources and network connections. Whenever you lift any heavy assembly, follow these guidelines: • Have a second person available to help lift the assembly; avoid lifting the assembly alone. • • Ensure that your footing is solid; balance the weight of the object between your feet. Lift the assembly slowly; never move suddenly or twist your body as you lift. Preparing for Installation 2-3 Safety Recommendations • Keep your back straight and lift with your legs, not your back. If you must bend down to lift the assembly, bend at the knees, not at the waist, to reduce the strain on your lower back muscles. • Always disconnect all external cables before lifting or moving the Cisco 12012. Caution To prevent damage, never attempt to lift or tilt the Cisco 12012 using the handles on the blower modules or on the power supplies. These handles are not designed to support the weight of the Cisco 12012. Safety with Electricity The line cards, redundant clock and scheduler cards, switch fabric cards, alarm card, blower modules, and redundant power supplies can be removed and replaced while the system is operating without presenting an electrical hazard or damage to the system. Follow these basic guidelines when working with any electrical equipment: • Before beginning any procedures requiring access to the interior of the Cisco 12012, locate the emergency power-off switch for the room in which you are working. • If an electrical accident occurs, proceed as follows: — Use caution; do not become a victim yourself. Disconnect power to the system. — If possible, send another person to get medical aid; otherwise, assess the condition of the victim and then call for help. — Determine if the person needs rescue breathing or external cardiac compressions, then take appropriate action. • • • Disconnect all power and external cables before installing or removing a router. • • Never install equipment that appears damaged. Never assume that power has been disconnected from a circuit; always check. Do not perform any action that creates a potential hazard to people or makes the equipment unsafe. Carefully examine your work area for possible hazards such as moist floors, ungrounded power extension cables, and missing safety grounds. 2-4 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Safety Recommendations In addition, use the guidelines that follow when working with any equipment that is disconnected from a power source, but still connected to telephone or network wiring: • • Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm. • Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface. • Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations. Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage Many router components are sensitive to damage from static electricity. Some components can be degraded by voltages as low as 30V. Conversely, static voltages as high as 35,000V can be generated just by handling plastic or foam packing material, or by sliding assemblies across plastic and carpets. Not exercising the proper electrostatic discharge (ESD) precautions can result in intermittent or complete component failures. To minimize the potential for ESD damage, observe the following guidelines: • • Always use an ESD wrist strap or ankle strap and ensure that it makes good skin contact. • Always place a card component-side up on an antistatic surface, in an antistatic card rack, or in a static shielding bag. If you are returning the item to the factory, immediately place it in a static shielding bag. • When installing a line card or RP, use the ejector levers to properly seat the card connectors in the backplane, then tighten both captive screws. These screws prevent accidental removal, provide proper grounding for the system, and help to ensure that the card connector is seated in the backplane. When handling a removed line card, switch fabric card, or RP, make sure the equipment end of your ESD strap is attached to one of the two upper card cage ESD connection sockets or to bare metal on the frame. Avoid contact between the card and your clothing. The wrist strap only protects the card from ESD voltages on the body; EDS voltages on the clothing can still cause component damage. Preparing for Installation 2-5 Site Requirement Guidelines • When removing line cards, clock and scheduler cards, switch fabric cards, or an RP, use the ejector levers to unseat the card connector from the backplane. Pull the metal card carrier out slowly, placing one hand along the bottom of the carrier to guide it straight out of the slot. • Handle line cards, clock and scheduler cards, switch fabric cards or an RP by the metal card carrier edges only; avoid touching the board or any connector pins. For safety, periodically check the resistance value of the antistatic strap. The measurement should be between 1 and 10 megohms. Caution Laser Safety Single-mode style line cards for the Cisco 12012 are equipped with lasers, which emit invisible radiation. Do not stare into open line card ports. Observe the following warning to prevent eye injury. Warning Because invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the aperture of the port when no cable is connected, avoid exposure to laser radiation and do not stare into open apertures. Site Requirement Guidelines This section provides the following site requirement guidelines that you must consider before installing the Cisco 12012: • • • • • Rack-mounting guidelines Airflow guidelines Temperature and humidity guidelines Power guidelines Site wiring guidelines 2-6 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Site Requirement Guidelines Rack-Mounting Guidelines Before installing the Cisco 12012 in telco-style or 19-inch equipment racks, consider the following general rack-mounting guidelines: • Install the frame in an enclosed rack only if the rack has adequate ventilation or an exhaust fan; use an open rack when possible. • A ventilation system that is too powerful in an enclosed rack can also prevent cooling by creating negative air pressure around the frame and redirecting the air away from the air intake vent. If necessary, operate the router with the rack door open or in an open rack. • • The correct use of baffles inside an enclosed rack can assist in cooling the router. Equipment located near the bottom of the rack can generate excessive heat that is drawn upward and into the intake ports of equipment above, leading to failures in the router. If the enclosed rack you are using does not have a ventilation fan, one should be installed. The rack-mounting hardware included with the Cisco 12012 is suitable for most 19-inch equipment racks or telco-style racks. We strongly recommend a rack-mount installation for the Cisco 12012 because of size and weight considerations. Following are specific rack-mounting guidelines for the Cisco 12012: • The Cisco 12012 weighs approximately 380 lb (172 kg) fully configured. To keep the equipment rack center of gravity as low as possible, mount the router so that the bottom of the router frame is no higher than 10-inches (25.4-cm) from the floor. • If you use telco-style racks, be sure that the rack is bolted to floor. The frame mounts to the two rack posts, and the rest of the frame is cantilevered off of the posts. Ensure that the weight of the Cisco 12012 does not make the rack unstable. Some telco-style racks are also secured to ceiling brackets, if necessary, because of the weight of the equipment in the rack. Make sure that the rack you are installing the Cisco 12012 in is secured to the building structure. • The height of the Cisco 12012 frame is 57-inches (144.8-cm). Allow sufficient space in the rack for the frame. • To mount the router between two posts or rails, the inner clearance (the width between the inner sides of the two posts or rails) must be at least 17.5-inches (44.5-cm). Preparing for Installation 2-7 Site Requirement Guidelines • Maintain at least a 6-inch (15.25-cm) clearance at the front and back of the router frame for cooling air intake and warm air exhaust. Avoid placing the router in an overly congested rack because the heated exhaust air from other equipment can enter the inlet air vents and cause an overtemperature condition inside the router. • • Allow at least 19 inches (48-cm) of clearance at the front of the rack for maintenance. • When mounting the router in a four-post or telco-style rack, be sure to use all of the screws provided to secure the frame to the rack posts. Install and use the cable-management bracket included with the router to keep cables organized and out of the way of line cards, power supplies, and the blower modules. Consider the equipment and cabling that is already installed in the rack. Ensure that cables from other equipment will not impair access to the upper or lower card cage, or require you to disconnect cables unnecessarily to perform equipment maintenance or upgrades. Figure 2-1 shows the outer dimensions of the Cisco 12012 frame. 2-8 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Site Requirement Guidelines Cisco 12012 Frame Outer Dimensions (Top View) 24 inches required for component removal Vertical mounting rail (rack mounting surface) 19.375 inches Front 17.4 inches 5 inches 21 inches Rear H10404 Figure 2-1 Preparing for Installation 2-9 Site Requirement Guidelines Airflow Guidelines The Cisco 12012 air circulation system consists of two blower modules: one mounted at the top of the frame (above the upper card cage) and the other mounted at the bottom of the frame (below the power supply bay). The blower modules maintain acceptable operating temperatures for the internal components by drawing cooling air in through a replaceable air filter and circulating the air through both card cages and the power supply bays. Observe the following guidelines when selecting a site to install the Cisco 12012: • The site should be as dust-free as possible. Dusty environments can clog the air filter, reducing the cooling airflow through the system. This can cause an overtemperature condition in the system. • Allow sufficient airflow by maintaining a minimum of 6 inches (15.2-cm) of clearance at both the inlet and exhaust openings on the frame. If the airflow is blocked or restricted, or if the inlet air is too warm, an overtemperature condition within the router can occur. Under extreme conditions, the environmental monitoring system will shut down the power to protect the system components. Temperature and Humidity Guidelines Table 2-1 lists the operating and nonoperating environmental site requirements. The ranges listed are those within which the Cisco 12012 will continue to operate; however, a temperature measurement that is approaching a minimum or maximum indicates a potential problem. You can maintain normal operation by anticipating and correcting environmental anomalies before they approach critical values. The environmental monitoring functionality built into the Cisco 12012 protects the system and components from potential damage from overvoltage and overtemperature conditions. To assure normal operation and avoid unplanned maintenance, plan and prepare your site before you install the router. 2-10 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Site Requirement Guidelines Table 2-1 Site Environment Requirements Specifications Minimum Maximum Ambient temperature, operating 32°F (0°C) 104°F (40°C) Ambient, temperature, nonoperating and storage –40°F (–40°C) 149°F (65°C) Ambient humidity, (noncondensing) operating 10% relative 90% relative Ambient humidity, (noncondensing) nonoperating and storage 5% relative 95% relative Altitude, operating and nonoperating Sea level 10,000 ft (3,050 m) Thermal output – 10,640 Btu/hour (maximum) Vibration, operating 5 to 200 Hz, 0.5 g1 (1 oct/min)2 – Vibration, nonoperating 5 to 200 Hz, 1 g (1 oct/min) 200 to 500 Hz, 2 g (1 oct/min) – 1. g = gravity. 2. oct/min. = octave per minute. Power Guidelines The Cisco 12012 can be configured with either AC-input or DC-input power supplies. The Cisco 12012 requires two AC-input power supplies or one DC-input power supply to operate. Site requirements differ depending on the type of source voltage. We recommend you follow these precautions and recommendations when planning power connections to the Cisco 12012: • Check the power at your site before installation and periodically after installation to ensure that you are receiving clean power. Install a power conditioner if necessary. • Install proper grounding to avoid damage from lightening and power surges. Warning AC operation requires a minimum configuration of two AC-input power supplies. Preparing for Installation 2-11 Site Requirement Guidelines AC-Powered Systems In sites where the Cisco 12012 operates with AC-input power supplies, observe the following guidelines: • The AC-input power supply operating between 185–264 VAC requires a minimum of 20-amp service, North America; 10-amp or 16-amp, International. • There are five styles of AC-input power supply power cords available (differing in plug type); make sure you have the correct style for your site. (See Figure 2-2 and Table 2-3.) All AC-input power supply power cords measure 14 feet (4.3 m). • • • Provide dedicated power sources for each power supply installed in the router. Install an uninterruptible power source where possible. Install proper grounding to avoid damage from lightening and power surges. Table 2-2 lists the nominal and acceptable value ranges for source AC power. Table 2-2 Source AC Power Specifications Specifications Nominal Value Acceptable Value Ranges AC input voltage 200 to 240 VAC1 180 to 264 VAC, single phase AC input line frequency 50/60 Hz 47 to 63 Hz AC input current 9.5 amps (@ 200 VAC) – 1. VAC = volts alternating current. 2-12 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Site Requirement Guidelines Figure 2-2 AC Power Cords Australian plug AS 3112 10A European plug CEE 7/7 16A H10884 North American plug L6-20 20A Italian plug CEI 23-16/VII 10A Table 2-3 United Kingdom plug BS 1363 13A Appliance coupler Hot IEC 320 C-13 10A AC Power Cord International Options Label Description Product Number North American 208 VAC, 60 Hz AC power cord CAB-GSR12-US= Australian 240 VAC, 50 Hz AC power cord CAB-GSR12-AU= European 230 VAC, 50 Hz AC power cord CAB-GSR12-EU= Italian 220 VAC, 50 Hz AC power cord CAB-GSR12-IT= United Kingdom 240 VAC, 50 Hz AC power cord CAB-GSR12-UK= Preparing for Installation 2-13 Site Requirement Guidelines DC-Powered Systems In sites where the Cisco 12012 operates with DC-input power supplies, observe the following guidelines: • Each DC-input power supply requires a dedicated 60-amp service. Table 2-4 lists the nominal and acceptable value ranges for source DC power. • For DC power cables, we recommend that you use 4-AWG, high strand count wire cable (three leads). • Lugs should be dual hole and able to fit over M6 terminal studs at .625-inch (15.86-mm) centers. Figure 2-3 shows the type of lug required for the DC-input cable connections. Table 2-4 Source DC Power Specifications Specifications Nominal Value DC input voltage –48 DC input current VDC1 (United States) Acceptable Value Ranges –40.5 to –56 VDC (United States) –60 VDC (International) –58 to –75 VDC (International) 50 amps (@ 50 VDC) – 1. VDC = volts direct current. Figure 2-3 DC Power Cable Lug All measurements in inches 2.25 End View Ø .267 2 holes .55 4 AWG conductor .63 .37 .08 2-14 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide H10402 Crimp area .25 Site Requirement Guidelines System Grounding Connection Guidelines Before you connect power or turn on your Cisco 12012, we strongly recommend that you provide adequate system ground for your router. System grounding (earth) receptacles are provided on the Cisco 12012. The grounding receptacles are located between the air filter tray and the power supply bays, on the card cage assembly mounting flange. To ensure the system grounding connection that you provide is adequate, you will need the following parts: • Two grounding lugs—Must have two M6 screw holes that have 0.625–0.75-inch (15.86–19.05-mm) spacing between them. The lug is similar to the type used for the DC-input power supply leads. (See Figure 2-3.) This grounding lug is not available from Cisco Systems; electrical-connector vendors, such as Panduit, provide this type of lug. • Four hex-head screws with locking washers—M6 (metric). These screws are not available from Cisco Systems; they are available from any commercial hardware vendor. • Two grounding wires—4 AWG recommended. The length of the wire depends on your router location and site environment. This wire is not available from Cisco Systems; it is available from any commercial cable vendor. Site Wiring Guidelines Following are guidelines for setting up the plant wiring and cabling at your site. When planning the location of the new system, consider the distance limitations for signaling, electromagnetic interference (EMI), and connector compatibility, as described in the following sections. When wires are run for any significant distance in an electromagnetic field, interference can occur between the field and the signals on the wires. This fact has two implications for the construction of plant wiring: • • Bad wiring practice can result in radio interference emanating from the plant wiring. Strong EMI, especially when it is caused by lightning or radio transmitters, can destroy the signal drivers and receivers in the Cisco 12012, and can even create an electrical hazard by conducting power surges through lines and into equipment. Preparing for Installation 2-15 Site Requirement Guidelines Note To predict and remedy strong EMI, you might also need to consult experts in radio frequency interference (RFI). If you use twisted-pair cable in your plant wiring with a good distribution of grounding conductors, the plant wiring is unlikely to emit radio interference. If you exceed the recommended distances, use a high-quality twisted-pair cable with one ground conductor for each data signal when applicable. If wires exceed recommended distances, or if wires pass between buildings, give special consideration to the effect of a lightning strike in your vicinity. The electromagnetic pulse (EMP) caused by lightning or other high-energy phenomena can easily couple enough energy into unshielded conductors to destroy electronic devices. If you have had problems of this sort in the past, you may want to consult experts in electrical surge suppression and shielding. Most data centers cannot resolve the infrequent but potentially catastrophic problems just described without pulse meters and other special equipment. These problems can cost a great deal of time to identify and resolve, so take precautions by providing a properly grounded and shielded environment, with special attention to issues of electrical surge suppression. SONET Connection Guidelines The SONET specification for fiber-optic transmission defines two types of fiber: single-mode and multimode. Modes can be thought of as bundles of light rays entering the fiber at a particular angle. Single-mode fiber allows only one mode of light to propagate through the fiber, while multimode fiber allows multiple modes of light to propagate through the fiber. Because multiple modes of light propagating through the fiber travel different distances depending on the entry angles, causing them to arrive at the destination at different times (a phenomenon called modal dispersion), single-mode fiber is capable of higher bandwidth and greater cable run distances than multimode fiber. The maximum distances for single-mode and multimode transmissions, as defined by SONET, are listed in Table 2-5. If the distance between two connected stations is greater than these maximum distances, significant signal loss can result, making transmission unreliable. 2-16 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Site Requirement Guidelines Table 2-5 SONET Maximum Fiber-Optic Transmission Distances Transceiver Type Maximum Distance between Stations1 Single-mode Up to 9 miles (14.8 kilometers) Multimode Up to 1.5 miles (2.4 kilometers) 1. Table 2-5 gives typical results. You should use the power budget calculations to determine the actual distances. Power Budget To design an efficient optical data link, evaluate the power budget. The power budget is the amount of light available to overcome attenuation in the optical link and to exceed the minimum power that the receiver requires to operate within its specifications. Proper operation of an optical data link depends on modulated light reaching the receiver with enough power to be correctly demodulated. Attenuation, caused by the passive media components (cables, cable splices, and connectors), is common to both multimode and single-mode transmission. The following variables reduce the power of the signal (light) transmitted to the receiver in multimode transmission: • Chromatic dispersion (spreading of the signal in time because of the different speeds of light wavelengths) • Modal dispersion (spreading of the signal in time because of the different propagation modes in the fiber) Attenuation is significantly lower for optical fiber than for other media. For multimode transmission, chromatic and modal dispersion reduce the available power of the system by the combined dispersion penalty (in decibels [dB]). The power lost over the data link is the sum of the component, dispersion, and modal losses. Table 2-6 lists the factors of attenuation and dispersion limit for typical fiber-optic cable. Preparing for Installation 2-17 Site Requirement Guidelines Table 2-6 Typical Fiber-Optic Link Attenuation and Dispersion Limits Single-Mode Multimode Attenuation 0.5 dB 1.0 dB/km Dispersion Limit No limit 500 MHz/km1 1. The product of bandwidth and distance must be less than 500 MHzkm. Approximating the Line Card Power Margin The LED used for a multimode transmission light source creates multiple propagation paths of light, each with a different path length and time requirement to cross the optical fiber, causing signal dispersion (smear). Higher order mode loss (HOL) results from light from the LED entering the fiber and being radiated into the fiber cladding. A worst-case estimate of power margin (PM) for multimode transmissions assumes minimum transmitter power (PT), maximum link loss (LL), and minimum receiver sensitivity (PR). The worst-case analysis provides a margin of error, although not all of the parts of an actual system will operate at the worst-case levels. The power budget (PB) is the maximum possible amount of power transmitted. The following equation lists the calculation of the power budget: PB = PT – PR PB = –18.5 dBm –(– 30 dBm) PB = 11.5 dB The power margin calculation is derived from the power budget and subtracts the link loss, as follows: PM = PB – LL If the power margin is positive, as a rule, the link will work. Table 2-7 lists the factors that contribute to link loss and the estimate of the link loss value attributable to those factors. 2-18 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Site Requirement Guidelines Table 2-7 Estimating Link Loss Link Loss Factor Estimate of Link Loss Value Higher order mode losses 0.5 dB Clock recovery module 1 dB Modal and chromatic dispersion Dependent on fiber and wavelength used Connector 0.5 dB Splice 0.5 dB Fiber attenuation 1 dB/km After calculating the power budget minus the data link loss, the result should be greater than zero. Results less than zero may have insufficient power to operate the receiver. For SONET versions of a line card, the signal must meet the worst case parameters listed in Table 2-8. Table 2-8 Line Card SONET Signal Requirements Single-Mode Multimode PT –18.5 –15 PR –30 –28 PB 11.5 13 Preparing for Installation 2-19 Site Requirement Guidelines Multimode Power Budget Example with Sufficient Power for Transmission The following is an example calculation for a multimode power budget based on the following variables: Length of multimode link = 3 kilometers (km) 4 connectors 3 splices Higher order loss (HOL) Clock recovery module (CRM) Estimate the power budget as follows: PB = 13 dB – 3 km (1.0 dB/km) – 4 (0.5 dB) – 3 (0.5 dB) – 0.5 dB (HOL) – 1 dB (CRM) PB = 13 dB – 3 dB – 2 dB – 1.5 dB – 0.5 dB – 1 dB PB = 5 dB The value of 5 dB indicates that this link would have sufficient power for transmission. Multimode Power Budget Example of Dispersion Limit Following is an example with the same parameters as the previous example, but with a multimode link distance of 4 km: PB = 13 dB – 4 km (1.0 dB/km) – 4 (0.5 dB) – 3 (0.5 dB) – 0.5 dB (HOL) – 1 dB (CRM) PB = 13 dB – 4 dB – 2 dB – 1.5 dB – 0.5 dB – 1 dB PB = 4 dB The value of 4 dB indicates that this link would have sufficient power for transmission; however, due to the dispersion limit on the link (4 km x 155.52 MHz > 500 MHzkm), this link would not work with multimode fiber. In this case, single-mode fiber would be the better choice. 2-20 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Site Requirement Guidelines Single-Mode Transmission The single-mode signal source is an injection laser diode. Single-mode transmission is useful for longer distances because there is a single transmission path within the fiber and smear does not occur. In addition, chromatic dispersion is also reduced because laser light is essentially monochromatic. The maximum overload specification on the single-mode receiver is –14 dBm. The single-mode receiver can be overloaded when using short lengths of fiber because the transmitter can transmit up to –8 dB. The receiver could be overloaded at –14 dB, but no damage will result. To prevent overloading the receiver connecting short fiber links, insert a 5 to 10 dB attenuator on the link between any single-mode SONET transmitter and the receiver. SONET Single-Mode Power Budget Example The following example of a single-mode power budget is of a two buildings, 11 kilometers apart, connected through a patch panel in an intervening building with a total of 10 connectors. Length of single-mode link = 11 km 10 connectors Estimate the power budget as follows: PB = 11.5 dB – 11 km (0.5 dB/km) – 10 (0.5 dB) PB = 11.5 dB – 5.5 dB – 5 dB PB = 1 dB The value of 1 dB indicates that this link would have sufficient power for transmission and is not in excess of the maximum receiver input power. Preparing for Installation 2-21 Tools for Installation Using Statistics to Estimate the Power Budget Statistical models more accurately determine the power budget than the worst-case method. Determining the link loss with statistical methods requires accurate knowledge of variations in the data link components. Statistical power budget analysis is beyond the scope of this document. For further information, refer to UNI Forum specifications, ITU-T standards, and your equipment specifications. Tools for Installation The Cisco 12012 is designed to be installed with a minimum number of tools. The following are required tools: • • • • • • • • • 1/4-inch flat-blade screwdriver 3/16-inch flat-blade screwdriver ESD-preventive wrist strap Antistatic mat Tape measure 10-mm wrench (either open-end or socket) for DC-input power supplies 9/16-inch or 15-mm wrench (either open-end or socket) to remove lag bolts from pallet Wire cutters Pliers 2-22 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Unpacking the Cisco 12012 Unpacking the Cisco 12012 To unpack your Cisco 12012, use the unpacking instructions in the document Cisco 12012 Unpacking Instructions posted on the outside of the shipping container. Note Do not discard the shipping packaging. You will need this packaging if you move or ship the router in the future. If packing material is lost or damaged, the Cisco 12012 packing materials are available as an orderable item; use Product Number PKG-GSR12=. Checking the Shipping Packaging Contents Check the contents of the shipping packaging and verify that the following are included with your shipment: • • One Cisco 12012, fully assembled (except for redundant AC-input power supplies) • One or more accessories boxes (one accessories box is shipped in the large cardboard box on the front of the pallet. Additional accessories boxes are shipped separately.) One to four power supplies. Systems configured for source DC operation are shipped with one or two DC-input power supplies installed in the power supply bay. Systems configured for source AC operation are shipped with two AC-input power supplies installed in the power supply bay. If your system is configured with redundant AC-input power supplies (one or two additional AC-input power supplies), the additional power supplies are shipped packaged in a large cardboard box on the front of the pallet. If you do not receive everything you ordered, contact a customer service representative for assistance. Preparing for Installation 2-23 Site Log Site Log A site log provides a historical record of all actions relevant to the Cisco 12012 operation and maintenance. Keep your site log in a common place near the router where anyone who performs tasks has access to it. Site log entries might include the following: • Installation progress—make entries in the site log to record installation progress. Note any difficulties encountered and remedies during the installation process. • Upgrades and removal/replacement procedures—use the site log as a record of system maintenance and expansion history. Each time a procedure is performed on the system, update the site log to reflect the following: — Any FRU installed, removed, or replaced — Any Cisco 12012 configuration changes — Software upgraded — Corrective or preventive maintenance procedures performed — Intermittent problems — Related comments Table 2-9 shows a sample site log page. Make copies of the sample or design your own site log to meet the needs of your site and equipment. 2-24 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Site Log Table 2-9 Date Site Log Example Description of Action Performed or Symptom Observed Initials Preparing for Installation 2-25 Site Log 2-26 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide CHAPTER 3 Installing a Cisco 12012 This chapter provides the procedures for installing the Cisco 12012 and contains the following sections: • • • • • • • • Installing the Brace Bar Removing the Cisco 12012 Components before Installing the Frame Rack-Mounting the Frame Reinstalling the Cisco 12012 Components after Installing the Frame Connecting Line Card Cables Connecting Route Processor Cables Connecting Alarm Card Cables Connecting Power Note You must install the Cisco 12012 in a rack; either a telco-style or a four-post unit. The Cisco 12012 is not designed to be installed as a shelf-mounted or a free-standing system. Installing a Cisco 12012 3-1 Before you install your Cisco 12012, your installation site should already be prepared. Ensure that you have planned a compatible location for the Cisco 12012 and that you have considered the following: • The location does not block the cooling air intake (front of the system) and exhaust vents (rear of system). There must be at least 6 inches (15.8 cm) of clearance in the rack for the air intake and exhaust vents. • • The location is a temperature-controlled, air-conditioned, dust-free area. • • The proper source voltage (AC or DC) receptacles have been provided. You have checked the power cables and power supplies for compatibility with your power service; check the labels on the equipment and ensure that the power service at your site is suitable for the Cisco 12012. Maintain at least 24 inches (61 cm) of clearance in front of the frame for working with line cards, blower modules, power supplies, or attaching network interface cables or equipment. Warning The Cisco 12012 must be installed in a rack that is secured to the building structure. To prevent system problems, do not mix power supply input types in the Cisco 12012 router. All power supplies installed in a router must be either AC-input or DC-input. Caution The Cisco 12012, fully configured, can weigh 380 lb (172.3 kg). The system installation process is structured to reduce the weight of the system by removing components from the card cage assembly and the frame, then installing the empty frame in the rack, and finally, reinstalling all of the components in the card cage assembly and the frame. To make the installation process easier, reduce the weight of the system. The installation procedure requires you to remove all of the components from the card cage assembly and the frame, then install the empty frame in the rack, and finally reinstall all of the components in the card cage assembly and the frame. 3-2 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Installing the Brace Bar Installing the Brace Bar An optional brace bar is shipped with every Cisco 12012 as part of the accessory kit. You install the brace bar across the front of the rack to support the frame while you secure the frame is in the rack. The brace bar can only support the weight of an empty frame. It is not designed to support the full weight of the Cisco 12012. Caution This is an optional procedure; you can install the Cisco 12012 in the rack without a brace bar. If you choose not to use the brace bar, proceed to the next section “Removing the Cisco 12012 Components before Installing the Frame.” Perform the following steps to install the brace bar (see Figure 3-1): Step 1 Determine the proper height to install the brace bar in the rack. We recommend that you install the brace bar not more than 12 inches (30.5 cm) above the floor to maintain a low center of gravity for the system. Step 2 Position the brace bar between the front posts of a four-post rack or telco-style rack; make sure that the bar is level. Step 3 Secure the brace bar to the rack using the two screws provided in the accessory kit. Installing a Cisco 12012 3-3 Removing the Cisco 12012 Components before Installing the Frame Figure 3-1 Installing the Brace Bar Brace bar Installation screw H10732 Telco-style rack Removing the Cisco 12012 Components before Installing the Frame To make the frame installation process easier, reduce the total weight of the system. The installation process requires you to remove all of the components from the card cage assembly and the frame, then install the empty frame in the rack, and finally reinstall all of the components in the card cage assembly and the frame. Before you can remove the Cisco 12012 components, you must position the Cisco 12012, mounted on its shipping pallet (with the shipping container disassembled), as close to the installation site as possible. A Cisco 12012 system configured for either source AC or source DC power is shipped with power supplies installed in the power supply bay. Redundant AC-input power supplies (third and fourth power supplies) are shipped in a large cardboard box on the front of the pallet. Procedures in the following sections provide the steps for removing the Cisco 12012 components: • • Removing the Blower Modules Removing Cards from the Card Cage Assembly 3-4 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Removing the Cisco 12012 Components before Installing the Frame Removing the Blower Modules The Cisco 12012 has two blower modules, which provide cooling air to the card cage assembly. The blower modules slide on rails into and out of the top and bottom of the frame and attach to the frame with two captive screws each. A snap-on blower-module front cover is mounted over the faceplate of each blower module. Perform the following steps to remove a blower module: Step 1 Attach an antistatic wrist strap to yourself and to one of the two ESD connection sockets located on the front edges of the upper card cage or to bare metal on the frame. Step 2 Grasp both edges of the blower module front cover and pull it straight out to detach the front cover from the blower module faceplate. (See Figure 3-2.) Set the front cover aside. Figure 3-2 Removing the Blower Module Front Cover Snap fasteners (4 places) Blower module 0 Blower module front cover T EC EJ E IER T TIV RR PK AC CA RX -1 OT SL -0 OT SL 1 0 0 X AU T SE RE L R OR CA JO ITI MA MIN CR E IER LL TIV RR CE AC CA RX E IER LL TIV RR CE AC CA RX E IER T TIV RR PK AC CA RX 2 T O/L AC E IER T TIV RR PK AC CA RX ALARM 1 3 MII ALARM 2 -45 RJ IL FA D LE AB EN 0 1 C CS 0 1 2 ALARM C SF OC-12/STM-4 POS Q OC-3/STM-POS OC-12/STM-4 ATM ROUTE PROCESSOR H10654 TX LL CO RX E IER T TIV RR PK AC CA RX K LIN Installing a Cisco 12012 3-5 Removing the Cisco 12012 Components before Installing the Frame Loosen the two captive screws on the blower module faceplate. (See Figure 3-3.) Step 3 Figure 3-3 Removing the Blower Module Captive screws 0 T EC EJ E IER T TIV RR PK AC CA RX -1 OT SL -0 OT SL 1 0 0 X AU T SE RE L R OR CA JO ITI MA MIN CR E IER LL TIV RR CE AC CA RX E IER LL TIV RR CE AC CA RX E IER T TIV RR PK AC CA RX 2 T O/L AC E IER T TIV RR PK AC CA RX ALARM 1 3 E IER T PK MII ALARM 2 -45 RJ IL FA D LE AB EN 0 1 C CS 0 1 2 ALARM C SF OC-12/STM-4 POS Q OC-3/STM-POS OC-12/STM-4 ATM ROUTE PROCESSOR H10655 TX LL CO RX TIV RR AC CA RX K LIN Caution The blower module weighs 22 lb (10 kg). Use two hands when handling a blower module. Step 4 Grasp the blower module handle and pull it straight out to disconnect the blower module from the connector at the back of the frame. Slide the blower module halfway out of the frame. Step 5 Place your free hand underneath the blower module for support and slide the blower module completely out of the frame. Set the blower module aside. Repeat Step 2 through Step 5 for the second blower module. 3-6 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Removing the Cisco 12012 Components before Installing the Frame Removing Cards from the Card Cage Assembly Before you can remove the card cage assembly, you must remove the cards installed in it. This section contains procedures for removing cards from the upper and lower card cages. The card cage assembly is a single assembly that includes the upper card cage, the lower card cage, and the power supply bay. (See Figure 3-4.) The card cage assembly slides on rails into and out of the front of the frame and attaches to the frame with six captive screws. Figure 3-4 Cisco 12012 Card Cage Assembly 0 EJE R IVE RIE PKT ACT CAR RX CT T-1 SLO T-0 SLO 0 0 X 1 ET AU RES CRI R L IVE RIE CEL ACT CAR RX R L IVE RIE CEL ACT CAR RX AL OR OR TIC MAJ MIN R IVE RIE PKT ACT CAR RX 2 E SOL CON ACO R IVE RIE PKT ACT CAR RX /LT ALARM 1 3 TX L COL RX R IVE RIE PKT ACT CAR RX LINK MII Upper card cage 5 ALARM 2 RJ-4 ENA FAIL D BLE 0 OC-12/STM-4 POS 1 CSC 0 1 2 ALARM SFC Q OC-3/STM-POS OC-12/STM-4 ATM ROUTE PROCESSOR Card cage assembly Lower card cage (behind air filter) INPUT: 200 -240V 10 A 50/60 HZ 2000 W ~ INPUT: 200 -240V 10 A 50/60 HZ 2000 W ~ INPUT: 200 -240V 10 A 50/60 HZ 2000 W ~ INPUT: 200 -240V 10 A 50/60 HZ 2000 W ~ Power supply bay AC OK OUTPUT FAIL AC OK OUTPUT FAIL AC OK OUTPUT FAIL H10662 AC OK OUTPUT FAIL Installing a Cisco 12012 3-7 Removing the Cisco 12012 Components before Installing the Frame Removing the Cards from the Upper Card Cage The upper card cage has 12 user-configurable slots (numbered 0 through 11, from left to right) that can support a combination of line cards and an RP. The upper card cage also has a non-configurable slot (rightmost slot, labeled Alarm card) for an alarm card. To reduce the weight of the card cage assembly, you need to remove the cards from slots 0 through 11. Note You do not need to remove any card blanks or the alarm card from the upper card cage. Note Each line card has a vertical cable-management bracket attached to it that manages the distribution and routing of the network interface cables from the line card to the external network. Leave the vertical cable-management bracket attached to the line card when you remove the line cards. The RP and alarm card do not have vertical cable-management brackets. Perform the following steps to remove a card from the upper card cage: Step 1 Attach an ESD wrist strap to your wrist and to one of the two ESD connection sockets located on the front edges of the upper card cage or to bare metal on the frame. Step 2 Proceeding from left to right, identify each card and note its slot number on a piece of paper. (This step will make reinstallation easier and will ensure that you reinstall cards in their proper slots.) Note Line cards and an RP are installed in slots 0 through 11 in the upper card cage. 3-8 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Removing the Cisco 12012 Components before Installing the Frame Step 3 Starting from slot 0 (left side of the upper card cage), select a card and loosen the two captive screws located at the top and bottom of the card. (See Figure 3-5a.) Step 4 Pivot the two card ejector levers out, away from the card to unseat the card from the backplane connector. (See Figure 3-5b.) Step 5 Grasp the card carrier edge with one hand and place your other hand under the carrier to support it. (See Figure 3-5c.) Slide the card out of the slot and place it immediately on the antistatic mat. Figure 3-5 Loosen captive screws b Pivot ejector levers away from card to unseat card 0 a Removing a Card from the Upper Card Cage (GRP Shown) T EC EJ R VE IE T TI RR PK AC CA RX -1 OT SL -0 OT SL 0 0 X 1 AU T SE RE R AL JOR NO IC IT MA MI CR R VE IE LL TI RR CE AC CA RX R VE IE LL TI RR CE AC CA RX R VE IE T TI RR PK AC CA RX 2 E OL NS CO T EC EJ LT O/ AC R VE IE T TI RR PK AC CA RX -1 OT SL -0 OT SL AU X T SE RE ALARM 1 3 TX LL CO RX R VE IE T TI RR PK AC CA RX K LIN CO NS OL E I MI IL FA D LE AB EN 0 1 C CS 0 1 GIGABIT ROUTE PROCESSOR H10704 2 5 -4 RJ ALARM C SF OC-12/STM-4 POS Q OC-3/STM-POS OC-12/STM-4 ATM I MI Grasp card carrier to slide card out of slot GIGABIT ROUTE PROCESSOR TX LL CO RX c ALARM 2 5 -4 RJ K LIN GRP Repeat Step 3 through Step 5 for the rest of the cards in the upper card cage. Installing a Cisco 12012 3-9 Removing the Cisco 12012 Components before Installing the Frame Removing the Cards from the Lower Card Cage The lower card cage is located below the upper card cage, behind the air filter tray on the front of the card cage assembly. Mounted in the lower card cage is an air deflector, which directs airflow in the card cage assembly. The lower card cage has five keyed, color-coded, horizontal card slots for the clock and scheduler cards and switch fabric cards. Clock and scheduler cards (light blue) are installed in the upper two card slots (slot 0 and slot 1); switch fabric cards (magenta) are installed in the lower three slots (slot 2, slot 3, and slot 4). When you want to remove or install either type of card, you must first open the air filter tray and pivot the air deflector up, out of the way to gain access to the lower card cage. Perform the following steps to access the lower card cage and remove the clock and scheduler cards and switch fabric cards: Step 1 Attach an antistatic wrist strap to yourself and to one of the two ESD connection sockets located on the front edges of the upper card cage or to bare metal on the frame. Step 2 To gain access to the lower card cage, loosen the two captive screws at the top of the air filter tray and pivot the tray down, away from the lower card cage. (See Figure 3-6.) 3-10 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Removing the Cisco 12012 Components before Installing the Frame Figure 3-6 Opening the Air Filter Tray IL FA D LE AB EN 0 OC-12/STM-4 POS 1 C CS 0 1 2 ALARM SFC OC-12/STM-4 ATM Q OC-3/STM-POS GIGABIT ROUTE PROCESSOR Air deflector Captive screw H10472 Honeycomb screen Air filter tray Air filter Captive screw To prevent damage, do not place any tools on the air filter tray or inside the lower card cage. Damaging the honeycomb screen on the air filter tray or in the lower card cage could restrict the air flow causing an overtemperature condition in the Cisco 12012. Caution Installing a Cisco 12012 3-11 Removing the Cisco 12012 Components before Installing the Frame Figure 3-7 To access the cards in the lower card cage, you must first move the air deflector up, out of the way. Lift the air deflector up and secure it to the top of the lower card cage by turning the air deflector latch knob counterclockwise. (See Figure 3-7.) Latching the Lower Card Cage Air Deflector Air deflector 1 C CS 0 1 2 ALARM SFC 3-12 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide 0 Air filter tray IL FA D LE AB EN OC-12/STM-4 POS OC-12/STM-4 ATM Q OC-3/STM-POS GIGABIT ROUTE PROCESSOR Air deflector latch H10473 Step 3 Removing the Cisco 12012 Components before Installing the Frame Step 4 Select one of the cards in the lower card cage. Grasp the two card ejector levers and simultaneously pivot both ejector levers 90 degrees away from the sides of the card cage to unseat the card from the backplane connector. (See Figure 3-8.) Figure 3-8 Removing Cards from the Lower Card Cage Card ejector lever Card ejector lever IL FA D LE AB EN 0 1 C CS 0 1 2 ALARM SFC OC-12/STM-4 POS OC-12/STM-4 ATM Q OC-3/STM-POS GIGABIT ROUTE PROCESSOR Lower card cage H10474 Switch fabric card Installing a Cisco 12012 3-13 Removing the Cisco 12012 Components before Installing the Frame Step 5 Touching only the metal card carrier, slide the card out of the slot and place it immediately on an antistatic mat. Repeat Step 4 and Step 5 for the rest of the cards in the lower card cage, then proceed to Step 6. Step 6 Release the air deflector latch (turn the latch clockwise) and lower the air deflector down to its stops. Step 7 Pivot the air filter tray up so that it is flush with the front of the lower card cage and tighten the two captive screws. Removing a DC-Input Power Supply If you ordered a Cisco 12012 configured for source DC power, the system is shipped with one or two DC-input power supplies installed in the power supply bays. Perform the following steps to remove a DC-input power supply from the power supply bay: Step 1 Attach an antistatic wrist strap to yourself and to one of the two ESD connection sockets located on the front edges of the upper card cage or to bare metal on the frame. Step 2 Turn the power supply power switch to OFF (O). Note Turning the power supply switch to OFF (O) releases a latch that secures the power supply in the power supply bay. Step 3 Using a flat-blade screwdriver or 10-mm nutdriver, turn the jackscrew on the power supply faceplate counterclockwise (eject) to unseat the power supply from the backplane connector. 3-14 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Removing the Cisco 12012 Components before Installing the Frame Step 4 Figure 3-9 Grasp the power supply handle and pull the power supply halfway out of the bay. (See Figure 3-9.) Removing a DC-Input Power Supply H10907 DC-input power supply Use two hands to slide power supply out of bay Installing a Cisco 12012 3-15 Removing the Cisco 12012 Components before Installing the Frame The DC-input power supply weighs 19 lb (8.3 kg). Use two hands when handling the power supply. Caution Step 5 Place your free hand underneath the power supply to support it, and slide the power supply completely out of the bay. Set the power supply aside. Repeat Step 2 through Step 5 for a second DC-input power supply. Note If your system is configured with only one DC-input power supply, two power supply blanks are installed in the empty power supply bays. You do not need to remove the power supply blanks. Removing an AC-Input Power Supply If you ordered a Cisco 12012 configured for source AC power, the system is shipped with two AC-input power supplies installed in the power supply bay. Systems configured with redundant AC-input power supplies have two power supplies shipped installed in the power supply bay and one or two redundant power supplies shipped in a large cardboard box on the front of the pallet. Perform the following steps to remove an AC-input power supply from the power supply bay: Step 1 Attach an antistatic wrist strap to yourself and to one of the two ESD connection sockets located on the front edges of the upper card cage or to bare metal on the frame. Step 2 Turn the power supply power switch to the STANDBY position. Note Turning the power supply switch to the STANDBY position releases a latch that secures the power supply in the power supply bay. 3-16 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Removing the Cisco 12012 Components before Installing the Frame Step 3 Loosen the captive screw on the power supply faceplate. The AC-input power supply weighs 18 lb (8 kg). Use two hands when handling the power supply. Caution Step 4 Grasp the power supply handle and pull straight out to disconnect the power supply from the backplane connector. Slide the power supply halfway out of the bay. Step 5 Place your free hand underneath the power supply for support and slide the power supply completely out of the bay. Set the power supply aside. Repeat Step 2 through Step 5 for the second AC-input power supply. Installing a Cisco 12012 3-17 Removing the Cisco 12012 Components before Installing the Frame Removing the Card Cage Assembly Perform the following steps to remove the card cage assembly (see Figure 3-10). Caution An empty card cage assembly weighs 65 lb (29.5 kg). You need two people to safely lift the assembly. To prevent injury, keep your back straight and lift with your legs, not your back. Step 1 Loosen the six captive screws on the front edges of the card cage assembly that secure it to the frame. (See Figure 3-10.) Step 2 With one person positioned on each side of the frame, grasp the handle at the top of each side of the card cage assembly and carefully slide the card cage assembly half way out the front of the frame. Note All electrical connections between the card cage assembly and the blower module harnesses in the frame are disconnected automatically when the card cage assembly is removed from the frame. Step 3 With your free hand, grasp the handhold cutout on each side of the card cage assembly and carefully slide the card cage assembly completely out the front of the frame. Set the card cage assembly aside. 3-18 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Removing the Cisco 12012 Components before Installing the Frame Removing the Card Cage Assembly from the Frame Front handle (2 places) Frame Card cage assembly Captive screw (6 places) Handhold cutout H10734 Figure 3-10 Installing a Cisco 12012 3-19 Rack-Mounting the Frame Rack-Mounting the Frame This section provides the procedure for installing the Cisco 12012 frame in a rack. Each side of the frame has mounting holes to secure the frame to the rack. For ease of installation, the holes on each side of the frame are divided into four groups: group A, B, C, and D. (See Figure 3-11.) Figure 3-11 Frame Mounting Hole Groups Frame Frame mounting holes group D Top blower module rails Frame mounting holes group C Frame mounting holes group B Card cage assembly rails Frame mounting holes group A H10477 Bottom blower module rails 3-20 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Rack-Mounting the Frame The mounting holes are drilled in the frame so that one mounting hole in each group aligns with a mounting hole in the rack. By using the corresponding mounting hole (in the same group) on the opposite side of the frame, you can level the frame in the rack. An empty frame weighs 75 pounds (34 kg). You need two people to safely lift the frame. To prevent injury, keep your back straight and lift with your legs, not your back. Caution Perform the following steps to remove the frame from the shipping pallet and install it in a rack: Step 1 Remove the four bolts and retainer clips that secure the base of the frame to the pallet. Step 2 With one person positioned on each side of the frame, grasp the front and side of the frame, lift the frame off of the pallet, and position the frame in the rack. (See Figure 3-12.) Step 3 If you installed the optional brace bar, rest the frame on the brace bar while you perform the next step. If you did not install the optional brace bar, two people are needed to support the weight of the frame while a third person performs the next step. Note If you want to install the brace bat at this time, refer to the section “Installing the Brace Bar,” earlier in this chapter; then continue with Step 3 above. Installing a Cisco 12012 3-21 Rack-Mounting the Frame Installing the Frame in the Rack H10738 Figure 3-12 3-22 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Reinstalling the Cisco 12012 Components after Installing the Frame Step 4 Look at the bottom group of mounting holes (group A) on the frame. (See Figure 3-11.) Align one of the holes in group A with a mounting hole in the rack. Step 5 Install one of the mounting screws provided. Step 6 Go to the other side of the frame and adjust the position of the frame so that the same mounting hole in the bottom group of mounting holes (group A) is aligned with a hole in the rack. Step 7 Install one of the mounting screws provided. Repeat Step 4 through Step 7 for mounting hole groups B, C, and D. Reinstalling the Cisco 12012 Components after Installing the Frame After you rack-mount the frame, you must reinstall all Cisco 12012 components. This section contains the procedures for reinstalling the card cage assembly, the line cards, the RP, the clock and scheduler cards, the switch fabric cards, and the blower modules. Note The procedures for reinstalling power supplies are provided in a later section. Installing a Cisco 12012 3-23 Reinstalling the Cisco 12012 Components after Installing the Frame Reinstalling the Card Cage Assembly This section contains the instructions for reinstalling the card cage assembly in the frame. The empty card cage assembly weighs 65 pounds (29.5 kg). You need two people to safely lift the card cage assembly. To prevent injury, keep your back straight and lift with your legs, not your back. Caution Perform the following steps to reinstall the card cage assembly: Step 1 With one person positioned on each side of the card cage assembly, grasp the handle on the front of the card cage assembly and the handhold cutout on the side of the card cage assembly. Step 2 Lift the card cage assembly and position it on the rails inside the front of the frame. Slide the card cage assembly fully into the frame until the card cage assembly front flanges make contact with the front of the frame. Note All electrical connections between the card cage assembly and the wiring harnesses attached to the frame are made automatically as you slide the card cage assembly in the frame. Step 3 Secure the card cage assembly to the frame by tightening the six captive screws. 3-24 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Reinstalling the Cisco 12012 Components after Installing the Frame Reinstalling the Blower Modules The blower modules slide into the frame on rails located at the top and bottom of the frame. You must position the blower module correctly in the upper or lower frame rails so that the blower module electrical connector (recessed in the back of the blower module) mates with the connector mounted on the frame. Perform the following steps to reinstall a blower module in the frame: Caution The blower module weighs 22 lb (10 kg). Use two hands when handling a blower module. Step 1 Attach a antistatic wrist strap to yourself and to one of the two ESD connection sockets located above the handles on the front edges of the upper card cage or to bare metal on the frame. Step 2 Using two hands to support the blower module, position it in front of the frame so that the blower module connector (recessed in the back corner of the blower module) is aligned with the connector mounted on the back corner of the frame. Note When you install the top blower module, the blower module connector should be on the right side (facing the frame). When you install the bottom blower module, the module connector should be on the left side (facing the frame). Step 3 Slide the blower module on the frame rails into the frame. Stop when the module makes contact with the frame connector. Installing a Cisco 12012 3-25 Reinstalling the Cisco 12012 Components after Installing the Frame Step 4 Firmly push on the blower module handle to seat the module connector in the frame connector. (When completely seated, the blower module faceplate flanges make contact with the front of the frame.) Note All electrical and control line connections are made automatically when the connectors mate. Step 5 Tighten the two captive screws on the blower module faceplate. Note The front covers for the top and bottom blower modules are different; the name “Cisco 12000 Series” appears at the upper left side of the top blower module front cover. The lettering is missing from the bottom blower module front cover. Step 6 Position the blower module front cover over the four alignment holes in the blower module faceplate and snap the front cover onto the faceplate. Repeat Step 2 through Step 6 for the other blower module. Reinstalling the Cards in the Upper Card Cage Before you begin reinstalling cards in the upper card cage, identify slot assignments by referring to the list you prepared when you removed the cards. Perform the following steps to reinstall a card in the upper card cage: Step 1 Attach an antistatic wrist strap to yourself and to one of the two ESD connection sockets located on the front edges of the upper card cage or to bare metal on the frame. Step 2 Select a card from the antistatic mat. Starting from slot 11 (right side of card cage), refer to your list of occupied card slots to determine which slot the card goes in. 3-26 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Reinstalling the Cisco 12012 Components after Installing the Frame Step 3 Grasp the front edge of the metal card carrier with one hand and place your other hand under the carrier to support and guide it into the card cage slot. Note There are alignment grooves at the top and bottom of each slot in the upper card cage. When you reinstall a card in the upper card cage, make sure you align the top and bottom edges of the card carrier in the slot grooves. Step 4 Carefully slide the card carrier into the slot until the ejector levers make contact with the front of the card cage, then stop. Step 5 Grasp the two line card ejector levers and pivot them away from the card until they are perpendicular to the line card faceplate to completely seat the card in the backplane connector. Step 6 Tighten the two captive screws at the top and bottom of the line card. Repeat Step 2 through Step 6 for the rest of the cards in the upper card cage. Note Card blanks must be installed in the upper card cage to fill any open slots. The card blanks are used to maintain proper air flow and for EMI considerations. Installing a Cisco 12012 3-27 Reinstalling the Cisco 12012 Components after Installing the Frame Reinstalling the Cards in the Lower Card Cage The lower card cage slots are keyed and color coded; clock and scheduler cards are installed in the upper two slots (light blue), and switch fabric cards are installed in the lower three slots (magenta). Perform the following steps to reinstall the clock and scheduler cards and switch fabric cards in the lower card cage: Step 1 Attach an antistatic wrist strap to yourself and to one of the two ESD connection sockets located on the front edges of the upper card cage or to bare metal on the frame. Step 2 To access the lower card cage, loosen the two captive screws at the top of the air filter tray and pivot the tray down, away from the lower card cage. (See Figure 3-6.) To prevent damage, do not place any tools on the air filter tray or inside the lower card cage. Damaging the honeycomb screen on the air filter tray or in the lower card cage could restrict the air flow causing an overtemperature condition in the Cisco 12012. Caution Step 3 To access the card slots in the lower card cage, you must first move the air deflector out of the way. Lift the air deflector up and secure it to the top of the lower card cage by turning the air deflector latch knob counterclockwise. (See Figure 3-7.) Step 4 Select a card from the antistatic mat. Determine which card slot the card should be installed in by checking the color of the label attached to the edge of the card carrier (near the ejector levers). Light blue labels identify clock and scheduler cards; magenta labels identify switch fabric cards. Note There are alignment grooves on both sides of each slot in the lower card cage. When you reinstall a card in the lower card cage, make sure you align the card correctly with both edges of the card carrier in the slot grooves. 3-28 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Reinstalling the Cisco 12012 Components after Installing the Frame Step 5 Grasp the card carrier edge with one hand and place your other hand under the carrier to support and guide it into the correct slot. Slide the card halfway into the slot. Avoid touching the card circuitry or any connectors. Note Make sure the card is centered in the slot. To do so, apply even pressure to both sides of the card carrier as you slide the card into the slot. Also, lower card cage cards have guide pins that make initial contact with the backplane connector as you slide a card in its slot. After the guide pins make contact, continue pushing on the card carrier until the card ejector levers start pivoting forward. Then use the ejector levers to fully insert the card in the backplane connector. Step 6 Pivot the card ejector levers out ninety degrees away from the sides of the card carrier. Step 7 Continue sliding the card into the card cage slot until the card ejector levers engage the alignment grooves in the card cage slot. Step 8 Grasp both card ejector levers and pivot them outward (toward the sides of the card cage) until they are parallel to the card carrier edge to seat the card in the backplane connector. Snap the card ejector levers into the sides of the card carrier. Repeat Step 4 through Step 8 for the rest of the cards in the lower card cage, then proceed to Step 9. Step 9 Release the air deflector latch and lower the air deflector down to its stops. Step 10 Pivot the air filter tray up so that it is flush with the front of the lower card cage and tighten the two captive screws. This completes the procedures for reinstalling components in the upper and lower card cages. Installing a Cisco 12012 3-29 Connecting Line Card Cables Connecting Line Card Cables This section contains the instructions for placing the network interface cables in the Cisco 12012 cable-management system and attaching the network interface cables to the line card ports. The Cisco 12012 cable-management system consists of two components: a horizontal cable-management tray mounted directly above the upper card cage, and vertical cable-management brackets that attach to each line card. Additional line card information is contained in the respective configuration note for each line card. For example, if you are connecting the cables for a Quad OC-3c/STM-1c Packet-Over-SONET (POS) line card, refer to the configuration note Quad OC-3c/STM-1c Packet-Over-SONET Line Card Installation and Configuration (Document Number 78-4333-xx), which accompanies every Quad OC-3c/STM-1c POS line card that is shipped from the factory as a FRU or as an installed item in a Cisco 12012. Perform the following steps to install the network interface cables in the Cisco 12012 cable-management system and connect the network interface cables to the line cards: Step 1 Attach an antistatic wrist strap to yourself and to one of the two ESD connection sockets on the front edges of the upper card cage or to bare metal on the frame. Step 2 Proceeding from left to right in the upper card cage, identify the network interface cables that attach to the first line card. Step 3 One network interface cable at a time, carefully route the identified cable through the horizontal cable-management tray and down to the line card interface port. (See Figure 3-13.) Note On line cards with multiple ports, route and connect network interface cables to the line cards starting at the bottom line card port and working up. 3-30 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Connecting Line Card Cables Step 4 Proceeding from bottom port to the top port (on line cards with multiple ports only), identify the network interface cable that connects to each line card port. Connect the network interface cable to the line card port. (See Figure 3-13a.) Step 5 Proceeding from the bottom port to the top port (on line cards with multiple ports only), carefully press the network interface cable into the vertical cable bracket cable clip. Avoid any kinks or sharp bends in the cable. (See Figure 3-13b.) Step 6 Proceeding from bottom port to the top port (on line cards with multiple ports only), route the network interface cable up the vertical cable bracket carefully pressing the interface cable into the rest of the cable clips. (See Figure 3-13c.) Avoid any kinks or sharp bends in the cable. Note Adjust the network interface cable in the vertical cable bracket cable clips to prevent any kinks or sharp bends in the cable. Repeat Step 2 through Step 6 for the rest of the line card interface cables. Installing a Cisco 12012 3-31 Attaching an Interface Cable to a Line Card Figure 3-13 0 R E IE KT TIV RR P AC CA RX 0 1 0 1 2 1 2 3 R E IE KT TIV RR P AC CA RX R E IE KT TIV RR P AC CA RX R E IE KT TIV RR P AC CA RX 2 3 R E IE KT TIV RR P AC CA RX R E IE KT TIV RR P AC CA RX 3 R E IE KT TIV RR P AC CA RX 3-32 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide R E IE KT TIV RR P AC CA RX R E IE KT TIV RR P AC CA RX R E IE KT TIV RR P AC CA RX Line card cable-management bracket R E IE KT TIV RR P AC CA RX R E IE KT TIV RR P AC CA RX Interface cable Cable clip Cable clips H10879 Connecting Line Card Cables Chassis cable-management tray a b c Connecting Route Processor Cables Connecting Route Processor Cables The console and auxiliary ports for the Cisco 12012 are located on the RP. The GRP has an optional Ethernet port and the PRP has two Ethernet ports. This section contains connection equipment and pinout information for the console, auxiliary, and Ethernet ports on the GRP and PRP. GRP Console and Auxiliary Port Connection Equipment The GRP has two EIA/TIA-232 ports: a DCE-mode console port and a DTE-mode auxiliary port. The console port is a DCE DB-25 receptacle for connecting a console terminal, which you need to configure the Cisco 12012. The auxiliary port is a DTE DB-25 plug for connecting a modem or other DCE device (such as a channel service unit/data service unit (CSU/DSU) or other router) to the Cisco 12012 (see Figure 3-14). Figure 3-14 Console and Auxiliary Port Connections EJ EC DB-25 female T -1 OT SL -0 OT SL T SE X AU RE Modem Auxiliary port Console port LIN LL TX CO K DB-25 male M II RJ -4 5 GRP H10735 RX Console terminal Installing a Cisco 12012 3-33 Connecting Route Processor Cables Note The console and auxiliary ports are asynchronous serial ports; any devices connected to these ports must be capable of asynchronous transmission. (Asynchronous is the most common type of serial device; for example, most modems are asynchronous devices.) Note In order to maintain Class B EMI compliance, shielded cables must be used on the console and auxiliary ports of the GRP= and GRP-B=. An updated version of the GRP-B= board (Rev. F0) is available. This version does not require shielded cables for Class B compliance. Before connecting a terminal to the console port, check your terminal’s documentation to determine the baud rate of the terminal you plan to use. The baud rate of the terminal must match the default rate (9600 baud). Set up the terminal as follows: 9600 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, 2 stop bits (9600 8N2). You need an EIA/TIA-232 DCE console cable to connect the terminal to the console port. Cisco Systems does not provide console and auxiliary port cables; cables are available from commercial sources. Note You must provide the EIA/TIA-232 cables to connect the terminal to the GRP console port or other devices to the auxiliary port. Cisco Systems does not provide console and auxiliary port cables; cables are available from other vendors. For compliance with GR-1089 (intra-building surge), you must use shielded cables on the GRP console and auxiliary ports. Because the connectors on some standard cables are tall enough to interfere with the front covers installed on the card cages, Cisco includes a lower-profile cable adapter that permits you to connect a flat cable with modular RJ-45 plugs to the GRP console port. For console and auxiliary port pinouts, refer to Table 3-1 and Table 3-2, respectively. 3-34 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Connecting Route Processor Cables GRP Console Port Signals Both Data Set ready (DSR) and Data Carrier Detect (DCD) signals are active when the system is running. The console port does not support modem control or hardware flow control. The console port requires a straight-through EIA/TIA-232 cable. Table 3-1 lists the signals used on this port Table 3-1 GRP Console Port Signals Pin Signal Direction Description 1 GND – 2 TxD Output Transmit Data 3 RxD Input Receive Data 6 DSR Input Data Set Ready (always on) 7 GND – 8 DCD Input 20 DTR Output Ground Ground Data Carrier Detect (always on) Data Terminal Ready GRP Auxiliary Port Signals The auxiliary port on the GRP is a DB-25 plug DTE port for connecting a modem or other DCE device (such as a CSU/DSU or other router) to the Cisco 12012. The port is located above the console port on the GRP faceplate. The auxiliary port supports hardware flow control and modem control. An example of a modem connection is shown in Figure 3-14. Table 3-2 lists the signals used on the auxiliary port. Table 3-2 Auxiliary Port Signals Pin Signal Direction Description 1 Signal Ground – Signal Ground 2 TxD Output Transmit Data 3 RxD Input Receive Data 4 RTS Output Request To Send (used for hardware flow control) Installing a Cisco 12012 3-35 Connecting Route Processor Cables Pin Signal Direction 5 CTS Input Clear To Send (used for hardware flow control) 6 DSR Input Data Set Ready 7 Signal Ground – Signal Ground 8 CD 20 DTR Output 22 RING Input Input Description Carrier Detect (used for modem control) Data Terminal Ready (used for modem control only) Ring GRP Ethernet Connection Equipment The Ethernet port on the GRP has both a media independent interface (MII), 40-pin, D-shell type receptacle and a media dependent interface (MDI) RJ-45 receptacle that are capable of data transmission rates from 10 and 100 megabits per second (Mbps). (See Figure 3-15.) Note At the auto-sensed data transmission rate of 100 Mbps, the Ethernet port provides maximum usable bandwidth that is less than 100 Mbps; a maximum usable bandwidth of approximately 20 Mbps should be expected from either the RJ-45 or MII connections. Transmission speed is determined by the network to which the Ethernet interface is connected and is not user-configurable. 3-36 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Connecting Route Processor Cables Figure 3-15 RJ-45 and MII Ethernet Connections NK LI CO TX LL RX M II To repeater or DTE -4 RJ RJ-45 cable 5 H10736 MII cable GIGABIT ROUTE PROCESSOR To transceiver, repeater, or DTE Both the MII and RJ-45 receptacles support IEEE 802.3u Ethernet interfaces compliant with the 100Base-TX and 10Base-T standards. The MII receptacle requires an external transceiver that permits connection to multimode fiber for 100Base-FX or 100Base-T4 physical media. Only one Ethernet receptacle, either RJ-45 or MII, can be used at a time. Two LEDs on the GRP faceplate show which Ethernet receptacle is active. Note The Ethernet port can use either unshielded twisted-pair or screened twisted-pair cables. In sites where extremely high immunity to noise is required, screened twisted-pair cable is recommended. Depending on the type of media you use between the MII receptacle and your switch or hub, the network side of your 100-Mbps transceiver should be appropriately equipped with ST-type connectors (for optical fiber), BNC connectors, and so forth. Figure 3-16 shows the pin orientation of the female MII receptacle on the Ethernet port. Installing a Cisco 12012 3-37 Connecting Route Processor Cables Figure 3-16 Ethernet MII Receptacle H6538 Pin 1 Jackscrew Pin 21 The MII receptacle uses 2-56 screw-type locks, called jackscrews, to secure the cable or transceiver to the MII port. MII cables and transceivers have knurled thumbscrews that you fasten to the jackscrews on the MII connector and tighten with your fingers. Use the jackscrews to secure your MII cable to the MII receptacle. Table 3-3 lists the signals used on the MII receptacle, and Table 3-4 lists the signals used on the RJ-45 receptacle. Table 3-3 Ethernet MII Pinout Pin1 In Out Input/Output Description 14–17 – Yes – Transmit Data (TxD) 12 Yes – – Transmit Clock (Tx_CLK)2 11 – Yes – Transmit Error (Tx_ER) 13 – Yes – Transmit Enable (Tx_EN) 3 – Yes – MII Data Clock (MDC) 4–7 Yes – – Receive Data (RxD) 9 Yes – – Receive Clock (Rx_CLK 10 Yes – – Receive Error (Rx_ER) 8 Yes – – Receive Data Valid (Rx_DV) 18 Yes – – Collision (COL) 19 Yes – – Carrier Sense (CRS) 2 – – Yes MII Data Input/Output (MDIO) 3-38 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Connecting Route Processor Cables Table 3-3 Ethernet MII Pinout (Continued) Pin1 In Out Input/Output Description 22–39 – – – Common (ground) 1, 20, 21, 40 – – – +5.0 volts (V) 1. Any pins not indicated are not used. 2. Tx_CLK and Rx_CLK are provided by the external transceiver. Table 3-4 Ethernet RJ-45 Pinout Pin Signal 1 TX+ 2 TX– 3 RX+ 4 Termination Network 5 Termination Network 6 RX– 7 Termination Network 8 Termination Network Figure 3-17 shows the pin orientation of the female RJ-45 receptacle on the Ethernet port. 87654321 RJ-45 connector Ethernet RJ-45 Receptacle H2936 Figure 3-17 Installing a Cisco 12012 3-39 Connecting Route Processor Cables Warning The ports labeled “Ethernet,” “10BASE-T,” “Token Ring,” “Console,” and “AUX” are safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits. SELV circuits should only be connected to other SELV circuits. Because the BRI circuits are treated like telephone-network voltage, avoid connecting the SELV circuit to the telephone network voltage (TNV) circuits. PRP Console and Auxiliary Port Connection Guidelines The system console port on the PRP is a DCE RJ-45 receptacle for connecting a data terminal, which you must configure. The console port is labeled Console, as shown in Figure 3-18. Before connecting the console port, check your terminal’s documentation to determine the baud rate of the terminal you plan to use. The baud rate of the terminal must match the default baud rate (9600 baud). Set up the terminal as follows: 9600 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, and 2 stop bits (9600, 8N2). The console port requires a straight-through RJ-45 cable. 3-40 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Connecting Route Processor Cables Figure 3-18 PRP Console and Auxiliary Port Connections EN K LIN ETH 0 PRIMARY -1 OT SL 0 OT SL 1 EN K LIN ETH 1 PRIMARY RX TX 3 RX AUX CONSOLE 5 70692 TX 4 2 1 Modem 4 Auxiliary port 2 3 Console terminal RJ-45 Ethernet cables 5 Console port Note The console and auxiliary ports are both asynchronous serial ports; any devices connected to these ports must be capable of asynchronous transmission. (Asynchronous is the most common type of serial device; for example, most modems are asynchronous devices.) Installing a Cisco 12012 3-41 Connecting Route Processor Cables PRP Console Port Signals The console port on the PRP is a DCE RJ-45 receptacle. Table 3-5 lists the signals used on this port. Table 3-5 PRP Console Port Signals Console Port Pin Signal Input/Output Description 11 — — — 2 DTR Output Data Terminal Ready 3 TxD Output Transmit Data 4 GND — Signal Ground 5 GND — Signal Ground 6 RxD Input Receive Data 7 DSR Input Data Set Ready 81 — — — 1. These pins are not connected. PRP Auxiliary Port Signals The auxiliary port on the PRP is a DTE, RJ-45 plug for connecting a modem or other DCE device (such as a CSU/DSU or another router) to the router. The port is labeled Aux, as shown in Figure 3-18. The asynchronous auxiliary port supports hardware flow control and modem control. Table 3-6 lists the signals used on the auxiliary port. Table 3-6 PRP Auxiliary Port Signals Auxiliary Port Pin Signal Input/Output Description 1 RTS Output Request To Send 2 DTR Output Data Terminal Ready 3 TxD Output Transmit Data 4 GND — Signal Ground 3-42 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Connecting Route Processor Cables Auxiliary Port Pin Signal Input/Output Description 5 GND — Signal Ground 6 RxD Input Receive Data 7 DSR Input Data Set Ready 8 CTS Input Clear To Send PRP Ethernet Connection Equipment There are two RJ-45 Ethernet interface receptacles on the PRP, providing media-dependent interface (MDI) Ethernet ports. These connections support IEEE 802.3 and IEEE 802.3u interfaces compliant with 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX standards. The transmission speed of the Ethernet ports is auto-sensing by default and is user configurable. The RJ-45 receptacles on the PRP provide two physical connection options for Ethernet interfaces. RJ-45 cables are not available from Cisco Systems; they are available from outside commercial cable vendors. To connect cables to the PRPs Ethernet interfaces (ports labeled ETH0 and ETH1), attach the Category 5 UTP cable directly to a RJ-45 receptacle on the PRP. The Ethernet interfaces on the PRP are end-station devices, not repeaters; therefore, you must connect an Ethernet interface to a repeater or hub. Note Only connect cables that comply with EIA/TIA-568 standards. (See Table 3-8 and Table 3-9 for cable recommendations and specifications.) Caution The Ethernet ports are primarily used as a Telnet port into the Cisco 12000 series Internet Router, and for booting or accessing Cisco IOS software images over a network to which an Ethernet port is directly connected. Cisco Express Forwarding (CEF) functions are switched off by default for security reasons. Cisco strongly cautions you to consider the security implications of switching on CEF routing functions on these ports. Installing a Cisco 12012 3-43 Connecting Route Processor Cables Figure 3-19 shows an example of the functionality of an Ethernet port. In this example, you cannot access Network 2.0.0.0 via the Ethernet port (ETH0) on the PRP in Router A; you can only access the hosts and Router C, which are in Network 1.0.0.0. (See dotted arrows in Figure 3-19.) To access Network 2.0.0.0 from Router A, you must use an interface port on one of your line cards (in this example, a Packet-over-SONET (POS) line card in Router A) to go through Router B, through Router C, and into Network 2.0.0.0. (See solid arrows in Figure 3-19.) Figure 3-19 Using the Ethernet Port on the PRP Network 1.0.0.0 Router A (Cisco 12000 series) Host A EO POS Host B Network 2.0.0.0 EO Router B (Cisco 7500 series) Router C (Cisco 7500 series) S6755 Host A PRP Ethernet Connections Figure 3-20 shows a PRP RJ-45 receptacle and cable connectors. The RJ-45 connection does not require an external transceiver. The RJ-45 connection requires Category 5 unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) cables, which are not available from Cisco Systems, but are available from commercial cable vendors. Table 3-7 lists the pinout for the RJ-45 receptacle. 3-44 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Connecting Route Processor Cables Figure 3-20 RJ-45 Receptacle and Plug (Horizontal Orientation) 1 75043 87654321 2 1 RJ-45 receptacle 2 Category 5 UTP cable with plug Warning The ports labeled Ethernet, 10BASE-T, Token Ring, Console, and AUX are safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits. SELV circuits should only be connected to other SELV circuits. Because the BRI circuits are treated like telephone-network voltage, avoid connecting the SELV circuit to the telephone network voltage (TNV) circuits. Table 3-7 PRP RJ-45 Ethernet Receptacle Pinout Ethernet Port Pin Signal Description 1 TxD+ Transmit data + 2 TxD– Transmit data – 3 RxD+ Receive data + 4 Termination Network No connection 5 Termination Network No connection 6 RxD– Receive data – 7 Termination Network No connection 8 Termination Network No connection Installing a Cisco 12012 3-45 Connecting Route Processor Cables Depending on your RJ-45 cabling requirements, use the cable pinouts shown in Figure 3-21 or Figure 3-22. Figure 3-21 Straight-Through Cable Pinout (Connecting MDI Ethernet Port to MDI-X Wiring) MDI-X wiring 1 TxD+ 1 RxD+ 2 TxD– 2 RxD– 3 RxD+ 3 TxD+ 6 RxD– 6 TxD– Crossover Cable Pinout (for Connecting Two PRPs) PRP PRP 1 TxD+ 1 TxD+ 2 TxD– 2 TxD– 3 RxD+ 3 RxD+ 6 RxD– 6 RxD– 75431 Figure 3-22 H11007 MDI wiring Table 3-8 lists the cabling specifications for 100-Mbps transmission over unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) cables. Note The transmission speed of the Ethernet ports is auto-sensing by default and is user configurable. 3-46 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Connecting Route Processor Cables Table 3-8 Specifications and Connection Limits for 100-Mbps Transmission Parameter RJ-45 Cable specification Category 51 UTP, 22 to 24 AWG2 Cable length (max) — Segment length (max) 328 feet (100 m) for 100BASE-TX Network length (max) 656 feet (200 m)3 (with 1 repeater) 1. EIA/TIA-568 or EIA-TIA-568 TSB-36 compliant. Not supplied by Cisco. 2. AWG = American Wire Gauge. This gauge is specified by the EIA/TIA-568 standard. 3. This length is specifically between any two stations on a repeated segment. Table 3-9 lists IEEE 802.3u physical characteristics for 100BASE-TX. Table 3-9 IEEE 802.3u Physical Characteristics Parameter 100BASE-TX Data rate (Mbps) 100 Signaling method Baseband Maximum segment length 100 m between DTE1 and repeaters Media Category 5 UTP (for RJ-45) Topology Star/Hub 1. DTE = data terminal equipment. Installing a Cisco 12012 3-47 Connecting Alarm Card Cables Connecting Alarm Card Cables The alarm card has two, 25-pin D-sub connectors, labeled ALARM 1 and ALARM 2, mounted on the alarm card faceplate. (See Figure 3-23.) Alarm Card Connectors CS FA EN Critical, major, and minor alarm LEDs Pin 1 C CR IT IC AL JOR OR IN MA M O AC E BL D 0 CS ALARM 2 IL FA ED /LT Pin 25 Audio alarm cutoff switch SF 0 1 Pin 1 ALARM 1 R R AL IC AJO INO M RIT M A C EN Pin 25 C IL L AB 0 C 1 SF 0 1 1 2 H10900 Figure 3-23 C 2 ALARM Clock and scheduler card and switch fabric card LEDs The alarm card connectors enable you to connect the Cisco 12012 to a site alarm maintenance system. Critical, major, and minor alarms generated in the Cisco 12012 system are displayed by LEDs on the alarm card faceplate. The generated alarms also control alarm relays mounted on the alarm card. The alarm relay contacts are accessible through the two alarm card connectors. 3-48 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Connecting Alarm Card Cables Table 3-10 lists the available common, normally open, and normally closed relay contacts available through the alarm 1 and alarm 2 connectors. Table 3-10 Alarm 1 and Alarm 2 Connector Pinout Pin Group Common Normally Open Normally Closed Critical audible alarm 2 1 14 Major audible alarm 16 3 15 Minor audible alarm 5 4 17 Critical visual alarm 19 6 18 Major visual alarm 8 7 20 Minor visual alarm 22 9 21 Alarm input 13 25 – Note Only safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits can be connected to the alarm 1 and alarm 2 connectors. Maximum rating for the alarm circuit is 2 amps, 50 volt-amp. Warning The ports labeled “Ethernet,” “10BaseT,” “Token Ring,” “Console,” and “AUX” are safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits. SELV circuits should only be connected to other SELV circuits. Because the BRI circuits are treated like telephone-network voltage, avoid connecting the SELV circuit to the telephone network voltage (TNV) circuits. Installing a Cisco 12012 3-49 Connecting System Grounding Connecting System Grounding Before you connect power or turn on power to the Cisco 12012, we strongly recommend that you provide an adequate system grounding (earth) connection for your system. Two system grounding receptacles are provided on each Cisco 12012. (See Figure 3-24.) To ensure the system grounding connection that you provide is adequate, you will need the following parts: • Two grounding lugs—Must have two M6 holes that have a 0.625-inch to 0.75-inch (15.86-mm to 19-mm) spacing between them and a wire receptacle large enough to accept a 4-AWG, or larger, multistrand copper wire. This type of grounding lug is not available from Cisco Systems; electrical-connector vendors, such as Panduit, provide this type of grounding lug. • Four M6 or equivalent hex-head bolts with locking washers and nuts—This mounting hardware is not available from Cisco Systems; it is available from any commercial hardware vendor. • Two grounding wires—4 AWG (0.204-inch [5.18-mm] diameter) or larger. The actual wire diameter and length are dependent on your router location and site environment. This wire is not available from Cisco Systems; it is available from any commercial cable vendor. 3-50 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide 0 EJE CT R IVE RIE PKT ACT CAR RX T-1 SLO T-0 SLO 1 0 0 X ET AU RES Locate the grounding receptacles on your Cisco 12012. (See Figure 3-24.) Step 1 System Grounding Receptacles Figure 3-24 CRI AL OR OR TIC MAJ MIN R L IVE RIE CEL ACT CAR RX R L IVE RIE CEL ACT CAR RX R IVE RIE PKT ACT CAR RX 2 E SOL CON ACO /LT R IVE RIE PKT ACT CAR RX ALARM 1 3 TX L COL RX R IVE RIE PKT ACT CAR RX LINK MII 5 ALARM 2 RJ-4 ENA FAIL D BLE 0 1 CSC 0 1 ALARM 2 SFC OC-12/STM-4 POS Q OC-3/STM-POS OC-12/STM-4 ATM ROUTE PROCESSOR H10899 Connecting System Grounding Perform the following steps to attach the grounding lugs to the grounding receptacles on your Cisco 12012: System grounding receptacles Installing a Cisco 12012 3-51 Connecting System Grounding Step 2 Position one of the grounding lugs over the grounding receptacle holes. Step 3 Insert the two bolts through the holes in the grounding lug. (See Figure 3-25.) Ensure that the grounding lug does not interfere with the other router hardware. Figure 3-25 Attaching a Grounding Lug to the Grounding Receptacles Bolts H10898 Grounding lug System grounding receptacles Step 4 Install the locking washers and nuts and tighten to secure the grounding lug to the frame. Step 5 Prepare the other end of the grounding wire and connect it to the appropriate grounding point at your site to ensure an adequate ground. Repeat Step 2 through Step 5 for the second system grounding connection. 3-52 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Connecting Power Connecting Power This section provides procedures for installing an AC-input power supply and a DC-input power supply. Select the procedure appropriate for your system. Note Detailed instructions for handling and replacing the Cisco 12012 power supplies are contained in the configuration notes Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router AC-Input Power Supply Replacement Instructions (Document Number 78-4334-xx) and Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router DC-Input Power Supply Replacement Instructions (Document Number 78-4330-xx). One of these configuration notes accompanies the respective power supply shipped from the factory as a FRU. These configuration notes are also available on the Documentation CD and on Cisco Connection Online (CCO). Caution Do not mix AC-input and DC-input power supplies in a Cisco 12012. To maintain agency compliance requirements and meet EMI emissions standards in the Cisco 12012 with fewer than four AC-input power supplies or only one DC-input power supply, power supply blanks must be installed in any empty power supply bays. Do not remove a blank from the bay except to install a power supply. Caution Note AC-input power supplies and DC-input power supplies differ in width. An AC-input power supply occupies only one power supply bay. A DC-input power supply is twice as wide and occupies two power supply bays. Warning AC operation requires a minimum configuration of two AC-input power supplies. Installing a Cisco 12012 3-53 Connecting Power Reinstalling an AC-Input Power Supply This section provides the procedure for reinstalling an AC-input power supply in the Cisco 12012. The Cisco 12012 power supply bays are labeled A1, A2, B1, B2 (from left to right). You should reinstall the AC-input power supplies in the bays in the following order: A1, B1, A2, and B2. Perform the following steps to reinstall an AC-input power supply: The AC-input power supply weighs 18 lb (8 kg). Use two hands when handling the power supply. Caution Step 1 Attach an antistatic wrist strap to yourself and to one of the two ESD connection sockets located on the front edges of the upper card cage or to bare metal on the frame. Step 2 Verify that the power supply power switch is in the STANDBY position. To prevent damaging the power supply backplane connector, do not use excessive force when installing a power supply into the bay. Caution Note Any bay that does not have a power supply installed must have a power supply blank installed to maintain airflow and for EMI considerations. Step 3 Using two hands to support and guide the power supply, slide it into the vacant bay. Push the power supply all the way into the bay until the faceplate is flush with the front of the bay. Note All electrical connections between the power supply and the backplane are made automatically when the power supply is fully inserted in the power supply bay. 3-54 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Connecting Power Step 4 Tighten the captive screw on the power supply faceplate. (See Figure 3-26a.) Figure 3-26 Connecting Source AC to the AC-Input Power Supply INPUT: 200 - 240V 10 A 50/60 HZ 2000 W ~ c Attach spring clip b Connect power cord d Connect power cord AC OK H10737 OUTPUT FAIL a Tighten captive screw Step 5 Locate the AC power cord and remove it from its shipping packaging. Verify that the AC power cord shipped with the power supply is the correct type for your site. Note If you have received the wrong type of power cord, contact your service representative for a replacement. Installing a Cisco 12012 3-55 Connecting Power Step 6 Plug the AC power cord into the power supply AC receptacle. (See Figure 3-26b.) Step 7 Clip the spring clip over the power cord plug to secure the plug in place. (See Figure 3-26c.) Step 8 Connect the other end of the AC power cord to the source AC receptacle. (See Figure 3-26d.) Note We recommend attaching each AC-input power supply to an independent power source for full redundancy. We also recommend that you use an uninterruptable power source (UPS) to protect against power failures at your site. Each AC-input power supply operates between 200 VAC and 240 VAC, and requires a dedicated 20A service for North American use and 10A or 16A for international use. Step 9 Verify that the source AC circuit breaker servicing the source AC receptacle is switched on. Note Do not turn the power supply power switch ON (|) at this time. Repeat Step 2 through Step 9 for the rest of the AC-input power supplies. This completes the Cisco 12012 hardware installation procedure. Proceed to the next chapter for procedures for observing system startup and performing a basic configuration. 3-56 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Connecting Power Reinstalling a DC-Input Power Supply This section provides the procedures for reinstalling a DC-input power supply in the Cisco 12012. You must meet the following site power and source DC power cable requirements prior to installing the DC-input power supply: Figure 3-27 • • A dedicated 60-amp service is available for each DC-input power supply. • Three power lugs—Must be dual-hole with .625-inch (15.86-mm) centers and able to fit over M6 terminal studs. (See Figure 3-27.) This type of lug is not available from Cisco Systems; electrical-connector vendors, such as Panduit, provide this type of lug. Power cables (three per power supply)—4 AWG, 0.204-inch (5.18-mm) diameter, high strand count. The cable length is dependent on your router location. This cable is not available from Cisco Systems: it is available from any commercial cable vendor. DC Power Cable Lug All measurements in inches 2.25 End View Ø .267 2 holes .55 4 AWG conductor .25 .08 .63 .37 H10402 Crimp area Installing a Cisco 12012 3-57 Connecting Power The card cage assembly power supply bays are labeled A1, A2, B1, and B2 (from left to right). If your Cisco 12012 is configured with only one DC-input power supply, reinstall the power supply in power supply bays A1/A2. If your Cisco 12012 is configured with a second (redundant) DC-input power supply, reinstall it in power supply bays B1/B2. Note Unoccupied power supply bays must have power supply blanks installed to maintain proper airflow and for EMI considerations. Perform the following steps to reinstall a DC-input power supply: The DC-input power supply weighs 19 lb (8.3 kg). Use two hands when handling the power supply. Caution Step 1 Attach an antistatic wrist strap to yourself and to one of the two ESD connection sockets located on the front edges of the upper card cage or to bare metal on the frame. Step 2 Verify that the DC-input power supply power switch is turned OFF (O). Step 3 Place the DC-input power supply faceplate-up, in front of the empty power supply bay. 3-58 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Connecting Power Loosen the two screws securing the power supply front cover in place. Lift up the cover slightly, then pull it away from the power supply faceplate. Set the front cover aside. (See Figure 3-28.) Step 4 Figure 3-28 Removing the DC-Input Power Supply Front Cover and Cable Bracket Standoff H10664 Front cover Bracket screws Step 5 Power cable bracket Remove the two screws that secure the source DC power cable bracket to the power supply faceplate and remove the bracket. (See Figure 3-28.) Set the two screws and bracket aside. Installing a Cisco 12012 3-59 Connecting Power Before proceeding to the next step, verify that the source DC circuit breaker servicing the source DC power cable you are attaching to the DC-input power supply is in the OFF position. Also verify that the power switch on the DC-input power supply is OFF (O). As an additional check, measure the voltages across the DC power cable leads you intend to attach to the power supply. All readings should be zero volts. Caution Step 6 Thread the source DC power cable leads up underneath the power supply handle. Allow sufficient slack in the power cable for strain relief. Note The color coding of the source DC power cable leads to the DC-input power supply depends on the color coding of the site DC power source. Typically, green or green/yellow is used for ground. Since there is no color code standard for the DC wiring, you must ensure that the proper polarity is connected to the DC-input power supply. In some cases, the source DC cables might have a (+) or a (–) label. This is a relatively safe indication of the cable polarity. Warning When installing the unit, the ground connection must always be made first and disconnected last. Step 7 Remove the nut and locking washer from each of the six power supply threaded terminals on the front of the power supply. Attach the source DC power cable lug to the power supply terminal in the following order (see Figure 3-29): • • • Ground to ground Positive (+) to positive (+) Negative (–) to negative (–). 3-60 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Connecting Power Figure 3-29 Connecting the Source DC Power Cable Leads to the DC-Input Power Supply – + Ground H10702 Circuit breaker alarm terminal block Source DC power cable Note When securing the ground, positive (+), and negative (–) power cable lugs to the power supply terminals, leave a small service loop in the ground cable. This ensures that the ground lug is the last lead to disconnect from the power supply if a great deal of strain is placed on all three leads. Installing a Cisco 12012 3-61 Connecting Power Step 8 Thread the power supply circuit breaker external alarm leads (if present) up through the power supply handle and attach them to the circuit breaker alarm terminal block on the power supply faceplate. (Some sites might not be equipped with a power supply circuit breaker external alarm.) Step 9 Position the source DC power cable leads underneath the power supply handle on the power supply faceplate in the following order from left to right: negative (–), positive (+), and ground. Step 10 Place the DC power cable bracket over the power cable leads and secure the cable leads and the cable bracket to the power supply faceplate with the two screws that you removed earlier. Step 11 Verify that the source DC wiring from the source DC breaker to the power supply is correct and that the terminal connections on the power supply are correct and tight. Note Verify the source DC cable connections to the DC-input power supply with a voltmeter. Always connect positive (+) leads to positive (+) terminals and negative (–) leads to negative (–) terminals on the power supply. Step 12 Position the power supply front cover so that the keyholes are over the two standoff screws on the power supply faceplate. Slide the cover down slightly to engage the two screws and secure it in place by tightening the two screws. To prevent damaging the backplane power connector, do not use excessive force when sliding the power supply into the bay. Caution Note The first DC-input power supply is installed in power supply bays A1/A2; the second DC-input power supply is installed in power supply bays B1/B2. 3-62 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Connecting Power Step 13 Using two hands to support and guide the power supply, align it with the grooves in the power supply bay, and slide the power supply into the vacant bay. (See Figure 3-30.) Push it into the bay until the power supply captive jackscrew makes contact with the power supply bay. Figure 3-30 Reinstalling the DC-Input Power Supply H10612 DC-input power supply Use two hands to slide power supply into bay Installing a Cisco 12012 3-63 Connecting Power Step 14 Using a flat-blade screwdriver or 10-mm nutdriver, turn the captive jackscrew on the power supply faceplate clockwise (insert) to seat the power supply into the backplane power connector. Do not overtighten the jackscrew. Note To prevent connector alignment problems, apply even pressure to the power supply by pushing at the top of the power supply with one hand while you turn the captive jackscrew with the other hand. Note All electrical connections between the power supply and the backplane are made automatically when the power supply is fully inserted in the power supply bay. Repeat Step 2 through Step 14 for a second DC-input power supply, then proceed to Step 15. Note Any power supply bay that does not have a power supply installed must have a power supply blank installed to maintain airflow and for EMI considerations. Step 15 Turn on the source DC circuit breaker servicing each DC-input power supply. Do not turn on the DC-input power supply power switch at this time. This completes the Cisco 12012 hardware installation procedure. Proceed to the next chapter for procedures for observing system startup and performing a basic configuration. 3-64 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide CHAPTER 4 Observing System Startup and Performing a Basic Configuration This chapter describes the initial system startup process, and provides the procedures for performing a basic configuration of your Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router (GSR). This chapter contains the following sections: • • • • • Starting the System and Observing Initial Conditions Configuring the Cisco 12012 Implementing Other Configuration Tasks What To Do Next? If You Need More Configuration Information Note The primary goal of this chapter is to provide you with the necessary information to configure your system so that you can access your network or access your Cisco 12012 remotely via Telnet. Complex configuration procedures are beyond the scope of this text, and can be found in the configuration publications listed in the section “If You Need More Configuration Information.” Also refer to the configuration notes that accompanied the line cards installed in your system. Observing System Startup and Performing a Basic Configuration 4-1 Checking Connections in Preparation for System Startup Checking Connections in Preparation for System Startup Before you start your system, perform a final check of all connections to ensure they are secure, as follows: • All line cards are inserted all the way into the slots in the upper card cage, and all captive installation screws are tightened. • • All cards in the lower card cage are inserted all the way into the lower card cage slots. • All power supplies have power cables connected; then, the opposite end of all power cables are connected to the appropriate power source. • The console terminal is connected to the console port, configured for the appropriate communications parameters, and turned on. To perform the initial configuration of a Cisco 12012 from a console, you need to connect a terminal connection to the Route Processor (RP) console port. • The Flash memory card that shipped with your system must be installed in PCMCIA slot 0 of the RP. All interface cable connections are securely attached; use cable strain relief where provided. Note By default, a Flash memory card with a valid Cisco IOS software image ships installed in PCMCIA slot 0 of the RP. Also, by default, the SW configuration register is set to 0x0102; therefore, the system will automatically boot from the Cisco IOS software image in the Flash memory card. Also, new Flash memory cards must be formatted before you can use them. After you start the system, refer to the section “Formatting a Flash Memory Card,” later in this chapter. After you complete the final check, proceed to the following section to start up the system. 4-2 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Starting the System and Observing Initial Conditions Starting the System and Observing Initial Conditions This section describes the initial system startup processes and procedures. Use the following procedure to start your system: Step 1 Turn ON each installed power supply by turning its system power switch to the ON (|) position. For AC-input power supplies, the green AC OK LED should go on. For DC-input power supplies, the green input OK LED should go on. Step 2 Listen for the blower modules; you should immediately hear them operating. In a noisy environment the blower modules might be difficult to hear; therefore, place your hand in front of the exhaust vents to verify that the blower modules are operating. Step 3 During the RP boot process, observe the RP alphanumeric LED displays, which are located at the end of the RP. (See Figure 4-1.) Each 4-digit display is capable of showing system messages and displays a sequence that is similar to that shown in Table 4-1. Figure 4-1 RP Alphanumeric LED Displays (Partial Front Panel View) PROCESSOR Upper alphanumeric LED display (four digits) H10780 Lower alphanumeric LED display (four digits) Observing System Startup and Performing a Basic Configuration 4-3 Starting the System and Observing Initial Conditions Table 4-1 RP Alphanumeric LED Display Sequences LED Display Indication MRAM nnnn RP microcode loads into MBus random-access memory (RAM); where nnnn is the microcode version. For example, Microcode Version 1.17 displays as 0117.1 MSTR RP This RP is enabled and recognized by the system. Assumes a valid Cisco IOS software version is running. 1. The version of microcode running on your GRP might be different. Step 4 During the line card boot process, which occurs immediately after the RP boots, observe the alphanumeric LED indicators on each line card. Line cards boot successfully from left to right. (The physical location of the alphanumeric LED displays on the line cards is the same as on the RP, shown in Figure 4-1.) Each line card displays a sequence that is similar to that shown in Table 4-2. Table 4-2 LED Display1 Line Card Alphanumeric LED Display Sequences Indication FABL WAIT The line card waits for the fabric downloader to begin loading into DRAM.2 FABL DNLD The fabric downloader loads into DRAM. FABL STRT The fabric downloader launches from DRAM. FABL RUN The fabric downloader runs in DRAM. IOS DNLD The Cisco IOS software downloads. IOS STRT The Cisco IOS software launches. 4-4 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Starting the System and Observing Initial Conditions Table 4-2 Line Card Alphanumeric LED Display Sequences (Continued) LED Display Indications IOS UP The Cisco IOS software runs in DRAM. IOS RUN The line card is enabled and ready for use. 1. The sequence shown in Table 4-2 might occur too quickly for you to view; therefore, this sequence is provided as a baseline for how the line cards should function at startup. 2. The fabric downloader loads the Cisco IOS software image onto the line card. Note If you have a Flash memory card installed in PCMCIA slot 0, the Flash memory card contains a valid, bootable Cisco IOS software image, and the software configuration register is set to 0x0102, the system will automatically boot this Cisco IOS software image. The system then enters the setup facility where you will be prompted to perform a basic configuration of the system (as shown in Step 6). Otherwise, the system will enter the ROM monitor, and the ROM monitor prompt will appear (>). In this case, you must proceed to Step 5. Step 5 If the ROM monitor prompt (>) appears, you then have to boot the Cisco IOS software image you want to use by entering the appropriate b command at the ROM monitor prompt (>): • b—Boots the default system software from onboard Flash memory (if it is present in onboard Flash memory) Caution To prevent system problems, use the b flash command option carefully; otherwise, you might instruct the system to boot a non-Cisco IOS software image from Flash memory. Observing System Startup and Performing a Basic Configuration 4-5 Starting the System and Observing Initial Conditions • • b flash—Boots the first file in the Flash memory card in PCMCIA slot 0 • b slot1: filename—Boots the file filename from the Flash memory card in PCMCIA slot 1 • b filename [host]—Boots the file filename from the server host using TFTP b slot0: filename—Boots the file filename from the Flash memory card in PCMCIA slot 0 After you boot a Cisco IOS software image, proceed to Step 6. (For additional information on system boot functionality, refer to the section “Manually Booting the System,” later in this chapter.) Step 6 While the system boots from the appropriate Cisco IOS software image, the console screen displays a script and system banner similar to the following: Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software IOS (tm) GS Software (GSR-P-MZ), Released Version 11.2(8)GS Copyright (c) 1986-1997 by cisco Systems, Inc. Compiled Sat 10-May-97 06:02a Observe the system startup banner. When you start up an unconfigured system for the first time, the system automatically enters the setup facility, which determines which interfaces are installed and prompts you for configuration information for each one. On the console terminal, after the system displays the system banner and hardware configuration, you will see the following System Configuration Dialog prompt: --- System Configuration Dialog --At any point you may enter a question mark '?' for help. Use ctrl-c to abort configuration dialog at any prompt. Default settings are in square brackets '[]'. Continue with configuration dialog? [yes/no]: You have the option of proceeding with the setup facility or exiting from setup and using configuration commands to configure global (system-wide) and interface-specific parameters. You do not have to configure the interfaces immediately; however, you cannot 4-6 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Manually Booting the System enable the interfaces or connect them to any networks until you have configured them. (For configuration information, refer to the section “Configuring the Cisco 12012,” later in this chapter.) The interface-specific LEDs on the line cards might not go on until you have configured the line card interfaces. To verify correct operation of each line card interface, complete the first-time setup procedures and configuration, then refer to the LED descriptions in the configuration notes for each line card to check the status of the interfaces. If the system does not complete each of the preceding steps, proceed to the chapter “Troubleshooting the Installation,” in this publication, for troubleshooting recommendations and procedures. Manually Booting the System This information in this section is required only if the system does not boot automatically from a specified default Cisco IOS software image. The system is administered using the Cisco command interpreter, called the EXEC. You must boot and log in to the system before you can enter an EXEC command. For security purposes the EXEC has two levels of access to commands: user EXEC mode and privileged EXEC mode. To enter privileged mode, you must enter the enable secret password, which is optional, but must first have been saved in memory. (For information on using passwords, refer to Step 5 and Step 6 in the section “Configuring the Global Parameters,” later in this chapter.) At the ROM monitor prompt, view the contents of onboard Flash memory using the following command: rommon 1> dir bootflash: File size 3277967 bytes (0x32048f) rommon 2> Checksum 0x6b331e30 File name Cisco 12012 gsr-p-mz.112-8 Also, view the Flash memory PCMCIA card in slot 0 or slot 1 using the following command: rommon 2> dir slot0: File size 3054276 bytes (0x2e9ac4) rommon 3> Checksum 0x97788495 File name Cisco 12012 gsr-p-mz.112-8 Observing System Startup and Performing a Basic Configuration 4-7 Configuring the Cisco 12012 Locate the Cisco IOS software image that you want to boot and boot from this image using the following commands, as appropriate: rommon 3> boot slot0:filename or... rommon 3> boot slot1:filename or... rommon 3> boot bootflash:filename If you did not change the configuration register setting, the next reload will revert to the default configuration register setting. (The factory default configuration register setting for systems and for RP spares is 0x0102.) Configuring the Cisco 12012 You can a complete a basic configuration of the Cisco 12012 system using one of the procedures described in the following sections: • Performing a Basic Manual Configuration Using the Setup Facility or the setup Command • Performing a Basic Configuration Using Configuration Mode Follow the procedure that best fits the needs of your network configuration. You will need to acquire the correct network addresses from your system administrator or consult your network plan to determine correct addresses before you can complete the router configuration. Performing a Basic Manual Configuration Using the Setup Facility or the setup Command At initial startup, the Cisco 12012 defaults to the setup facility; the system automatically goes into the setup facility. (The setup command facility functions exactly the same as a completely unconfigured system functions when you first boot it up. You can run the setup facility any time you are at the enable prompt (#) by entering the setup command.) Two parameters of the system configuration are considered during setup: global parameters and interface parameters. 4-8 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Configuring the Cisco 12012 The primary difference between what you see with the setup facility and what you see with the setup command facility is that with the latter, any current system configuration defaults are displayed in square brackets [ ] as you move through the setup command process and are queried by the system to make changes. For example, during the setup facility for a POS interface, assuming the interface has not been configured, you will see the following: Configuring interface POS4/0: Is this interface in use?: yes Configure IP on this interface?: yes Note that no default or current conditions are shown in square brackets [ ]. Conversely, you will see the following during the setup command facility, assuming the POS interface has been configured and you are being queried by the system to change it: Configuring interface POS4/0: Is this interface in use?[yes]: yes Configure IP on this interface?[yes]: yes Note that the default or current conditions of the interface are shown in square brackets [ ]. Proceed to the following section to configure the system using the setup facility or the setup command facility. Differences are clearly noted. Configuring the Global Parameters When you first start the setup facility or enter the setup command, you are queried by the system to configure the global parameters. The global parameters are used for controlling system-wide settings. Use the following procedure to boot the Cisco 12012 and enter the global parameters: Step 1 Connect a console terminal to the console port on the RP, and then boot the system to the user EXEC prompt (Router>). Step 2 When you have booted the system, the following information appears after about 30 seconds. (This information is similar to what should appear on your console screen.) When you see this information displayed, you have successfully booted your system: Observing System Startup and Performing a Basic Configuration 4-9 Configuring the Cisco 12012 System Bootstrap, Version 11.2(8)GS [biff 571], RELEASED SOFTWARE Copyright (c) 1994-1997 by cisco Systems, Inc. Restricted Rights Legend Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at FAR sec. 52.227-19 and subparagraph (c) (1) (ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS sec. 252.227-7013. cisco Systems, Inc. 170 West Tasman Drive San Jose, California 95134-1706 Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software IOS (tm) GS Software (GSR-P-MZ), Released Version 11.2(8)GS [biff-bfr_112] Copyright (c) 1986-1997 by cisco Systems, Inc. Compiled Mon 25-Aug-97 20:13 by biff Image text-base: 0x60010900, data-base: 0x604FE000 ROM: System Bootstrap, Version 11.2(8)GS [biff-bfr_112], RELEASED SOFTWARE BOOTFLASH: GS Software (GSR-BOOT-M), Released Version 11.2(8)GS [biff-bfr_112 1913] Router uptime is 20 days, 12 hours, 16 minutes System restarted by reload System image file is “biff/gsr-p-mz”, booted via tftp from 1.1.1.254 cisco GRP (R5000) processor (revision 0x00) with 65536K bytes of memory. Processor board ID 00000000 R5000 processor, Implementation 35, Revision 2.1 (512KB Level 2 Cache) Last reset from power-on X.25 software, Version 2.0, NET2, BFE and GOSIP compliant. 2 four-port OC3 POS controllers (8 POS). 5 OC12 POS controllers (5 POS). 1 Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s) 13 Packet over Sonet network interface(s) 507K bytes of non-volatile configuration memory. 4-10 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Configuring the Cisco 12012 20480K bytes of Flash PCMCIA card at slot 0 (Sector size 128K). 8192K bytes of Flash internal SIMM (Sector size 256K). Notice: NVRAM invalid, possibly due to write erase. Note The first two sections of the preceding configuration script (the banner and the installed hardware) appear only at initial system startup. On subsequent uses of the setup command facility, the setup script begins with the following System Configuration Dialog. --- System Configuration Dialog --At any point you may enter a question mark '?' for help. Use ctrl-c to abort configuration dialog at any prompt. Default settings are in square brackets '[]'. Continue with configuration dialog? [yes/no]: Note The examples in this section represent a continuation of the setup facility or the setup command facility. Step 3 Enter yes or press Return when asked if you want to enter the configuration dialog and if you want to see the current interface summary. Press Return to accept the default (yes): Would you like to enter the initial configuration dialog? [yes]: First, would you like to see the current interface summary? [yes]: In the following example of a yes response (during the setup facility), the partial summary shows a Cisco 12012 system at first-time startup; that is, nothing has been configured, and the following summary reflects this. Interface Ethernet0 POS3/0 POS3/1 IP-Address unassigned unassigned unassigned OK? YES YES YES Method unset unset unset Status Protocol administratively down down administratively down down administratively down down Observing System Startup and Performing a Basic Configuration 4-11 Configuring the Cisco 12012 POS3/2 POS3/3 ATM4/0 (Additional unassigned YES unset administratively down down unassigned YES unset administratively down down unassigned YES unset administratively down down displayed text omitted from this example.) In the following example of a yes response (during the setup command facility), the partial summary shows a Cisco 12012 system in which some interfaces have already been configured, and the following summary reflects this. Interface Ethernet0 POS3/0 POS3/1 POS3/2 POS3/3 ATM4/0 (Additional IP-Address OK? Method Status 3.3.1.1 YES NVRAM up 2.1.1.1 YES NVRAM up 2.1.1.2 YES NVRAM up 2.1.1.3 YES NVRAM up 2.1.1.4 YES NVRAM up 1.1.1.2 YES NVRAM up displayed text omitted from this example.) Step 4 Protocol up up up up up up Choose which protocols to support on your interfaces. For Internet Protocol (IP)–only installations, you can accept the default values for most of the questions. A typical minimal configuration using IP follows, and continues through Step 10: Configuring global parameters: Enter host name [Router]: Router Step 5 Enter the enable secret password when the following is displayed, and make a note of this password for future reference: The enable secret is a one-way cryptographic secret used instead of the enable password when it exists. Enter enable secret []: barney Step 6 Enter the enable password when the following is displayed, and make a note of this password for future reference: The enable password is used when there is no enable secret and when using older software and some boot images. Enter enable password: wilma 4-12 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Configuring the Cisco 12012 The commands available at the user level are a subset of those available at the privileged level. Because many privileged-level EXEC commands are used to set operating parameters, you should password-protect these commands to prevent unauthorized use. The enable secret password functionality is available for Cisco 12000 series systems. You must enter the correct password to gain access to privileged-level commands. When you are running from the boot ROM monitor, the enable password might be used depending on your boot ROM level. The passwords should be different for maximum security. If you enter the same password for both during the setup script, the system will accept it, but you will receive a warning message indicating that you should enter a different password. An enable secret password can contain from 1 to 25 uppercase and lowercase alphanumeric characters; an enable password can contain any number of uppercase and lowercase alphanumeric characters. In both cases, a number cannot be the first character. Spaces are also valid password characters; for example, “two words” is a valid password. Leading spaces are ignored; trailing spaces are recognized. Step 7 Enter the virtual terminal password when the following is displayed, and make a note of this password for future reference: Enter virtual terminal password: bambam Step 8 In most cases you will use IP routing. If so, you must also select an interior routing protocol. You can specify Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (IGRP) to operate on your system using setup. Enter yes (the default) or press Return to configure IP, and then select IGRP: Configure IP? [yes]: Configure IGRP routing? [yes]: Your IGRP autonomous system number [1]: 199 Note For complete information on IP routing and autonomous system numbering, refer to the appropriate software configuration publications, which are listed in the section “If You Need More Configuration Information,” later in this chapter. The Ethernet interface does not support external routing functions. Observing System Startup and Performing a Basic Configuration 4-13 Configuring the Cisco 12012 Step 9 Enter yes or no to accept or refuse SNMP management: Configure SNMP Network Management? [yes]: Community string [public]: Note The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is the most widely supported open standard for network management. It provides a means to access and set configuration and run-time parameters of routers and communication servers. SNMP defines a set of functions that can be used to monitor and control network elements. (For complete information on SNMP, refer to the appropriate software configuration publications, which are listed in the section “If You Need More Configuration Information,” later in this chapter.) Step 10 Enter yes or no to accept or refuse CLNS management: Configure CLNS? [no]: yes CLNS router tag [area_1]: CLNS domain [49]: CLNS area [0001]: CLNS station id [0027.25E9.B640]: Note The Connectionless Network Service (CLNS) is an Open System Interconnection (OSI) layer service that does not require a circuit to be established before data is transmitted. CLNS routes messages to their destinations independently of any other messages. (For complete information on CLNS, refer to the appropriate software configuration publications, which are listed in the section “If You Need More Configuration Information,” later in this chapter.) As a review of what you have done, the following sample display includes a continuous listing of all configuration parameters you selected in Steps 4 through 10. These parameters and their defaults are shown in the order in which they appeared on your console terminal. 4-14 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Configuring the Cisco 12012 Configuring global parameters: Enter host name: Router Enter enable secret: barney Enter enable password: wilma Enter virtual terminal password: bambam Configure IP?: yes Configure IGRP routing?: yes Your IGRP autonomous system number [1]: 199 Configure SNMP Network Management?: yes Community string [public]: Configure CLNS? [no]: yes CLNS router tag [area_1]: CLNS domain [49]: CLNS area [0001]: CLNS station id [0027.25E9.B640]: This completes the portion of the setup facility for configuring global parameters. The setup facility continues for configuring interfaces; refer to the following section. Configuring Interfaces This section provides steps for configuring installed interfaces (using the setup facility or setup command facility) to allow communication over your external networks. To configure the interface parameters, you need your interface network addresses, subnet mask information, and you need to know which protocols you want to configure; consult with your network administrator for this information. (For additional interface configuration information on each of the line cards available for the Cisco 12012, refer to the individual configuration notes that shipped with your line cards.) Note The examples in this section represent a continuation of the setup facility or the setup command facility and are intended as examples only. Your configuration might look differently depending on your configuration requirements. Observing System Startup and Performing a Basic Configuration 4-15 Configuring the Cisco 12012 Use the following procedure to configure the interfaces installed in your Cisco 12012: Step 1 The IEEE 802.3u interface, located on the RP, allows connections to Ethernet networks. In the following example, the system is being configured for the Ethernet interface using IP. (Note that the Ethernet interface does not support external routing functions.) Respond as appropriate for your needs, using your own address and subnet mask for the setup prompts. Configuring interface Ethernet0: Is this interface in use?: yes Configure IP on this interface?: yes IP address for this interface: 3.3.1.1 Number of bits in subnet field: 8 Class A network is 3.0.0.0, 8 subnet bits; mask is 255.255.0.0 Configure CLNS on this interface?: yes Step 2 The Packet-Over-SONET (POS) interfaces allow connections to external OC-3/STM-1 or OC-12/STM-4 networks. In the following example, the system is being configured for a POS interface using IP. Respond as appropriate for your needs, using your own address and subnet mask for the setup prompts. (Also refer to Step 3, which shows this same interface being configured for IP unnumbered; use whichever step is most appropriate for your needs.) Configuring interface POS4/0: Is this interface in use?: yes Configure IP on this interface?: yes Configure IP unnumbered on this interface?: no IP address for this interface: 2.1.1.1 Number of bits in subnet field: 0 Class A network is 2.0.0.0, 0 subnet bits; mask is 255.0.0.0 Configure CLNS on this interface?: yes Note For POS interfaces the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) default is 32-bits. For more complete POS interface configuration information, refer to the configuration notes Quad OC-3c/STM-1c Packet-Over-SONET Line Card Installation and Configuration (Document Number 78-4333-xx) and 4-16 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Configuring the Cisco 12012 OC-12c/STM-4c Packet-Over-SONET Line Card Installation and Configuration (Document Number 78-4341-xx) that accompanied your Quad OC-3c/STM-1c and OC-12c/STM-4c POS line cards, respectively. Step 3 In the following example, the system is being configured for a POS interface using IP unnumbered. Respond as appropriate for your needs: Configuring interface POS4/0: Is this interface in use?: yes Configure IP on this interface?: yes Configure IP unnumbered on this interface?: yes Assign to which interface: ethernet0 Configure CLNS on this interface?: yes Repeat Step 2 and Step 3 for each POS interface you need to configure; then, if you have ATM interfaces installed, proceed to Step 4. Otherwise, proceed to Step 5 to check and verify your configuration parameters. Step 4 The Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) interfaces allow connections to external OC-12/STM-4 networks. In the following example, the system is being configured for an ATM interface using IP. Respond as appropriate for your needs, using your own address and subnet mask for the setup prompts: Configuring interface parameters: Configuring interface ATM1/0: Is this interface in use?: yes Configure IP on this interface?: yes IP address for this interface: 1.1.1.2 Number of bits in subnet field: 0 Class A network is 1.0.0.0, 0 subnet bits; mask is 255.0.0.0 Note For the ATM interfaces in your system, additional configuration parameters might be required before you can fully use these interfaces (such as configuring permanent virtual circuits [PVCs], and so forth), but are beyond the scope of this publication. Observing System Startup and Performing a Basic Configuration 4-17 Configuring the Cisco 12012 For more complete ATM interface configuration information, refer to the configuration note OC-12c/STM-4c Asynchronous Transfer Mode Line Card Installation and Configuration (Document Number 78-4344-xx) that accompanied your OC-12c/STM-4c ATM line card. Repeat Step 4 for each ATM interface you need to configure; then, to check and verify your configuration parameters, proceed to Step 5. Step 5 When your interface configuration is complete (you reach and respond to the configuration dialog for the last installed interface), check and verify the entire list of configuration parameters, which should be displayed on your console terminal and end with the following query: Use this configuration? [yes/no]: A no response places you back at the enabled mode prompt (#) and you will need to reissue the setup command to reenter your configuration. A yes response writes the running configuration to NVRAM, as follows: Use this configuration? [yes/no]: yes [OK] Use the enabled mode ‘configure’ command to modify this configuration. Press RETURN to get started! After you press the Return key, the following prompt will appear: Router> This completes the procedures for configuring global parameters and interface parameters in your system using the setup facility or setup command. Your Ethernet, POS, and ATM interfaces are now available for limited use. If you want to modify the currently saved configuration parameters after the initial configuration, enter the setup command; or, to perform more complex configurations, enter configuration mode and use the configure command. 4-18 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Configuring the Cisco 12012 Check the current state of the Cisco 12012 using the show version command, which displays the release of Cisco IOS software that is available on the Cisco 12012 and the installed interfaces, as follows: Router> sh version Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software IOS (tm) GS Software (GSR-P-MZ), Released Version 11.2(8)GS [biff-bfr_112] Copyright (c) 1986-1997 by cisco Systems, Inc. Compiled Mon 25-Aug-97 20:13 by biff Image text-base: 0x60010900, data-base: 0x604FE000 ROM: System Bootstrap, Version 11.2(8)GS [biff-bfr_112], RELEASED SOFTWARE BOOTFLASH: GS Software (GSR-BOOT-M), Released Version 11.2(8)GS [biff-bfr_112 1913] Router uptime is 20 days, 12 hours, 16 minutes System restarted by reload System image file is “biff/gsr-p-mz”, booted via tftp from 1.1.1.254 cisco GRP (R5000) processor (revision 0x00) with 65536K bytes of memory. Processor board ID 00000000 R5000 processor, Implementation 35, Revision 2.1 (512KB Level 2 Cache) Last reset from power-on X.25 software, Version 2.0, NET2, BFE and GOSIP compliant. 1 Single-port OC12c ATM controller (1 ATM). 1 four-port OC3 POS controller (4 POS). 1 Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s) 1 ATM network interface(s) 4 Packet over Sonet network interface(s) 507K bytes of non-volatile configuration memory. 20480K bytes of Flash PCMCIA card at slot 0 (Sector size 128K). 8192K bytes of Flash internal SIMM (Sector size 256K). Configuration register is 0x0102 Router# For additional interface configuration information, refer to the configuration notes that accompanied your line cards. For more information on specific system configurations, refer to the section “If You Need More Configuration Information,” later in this chapter. Observing System Startup and Performing a Basic Configuration 4-19 Configuring the Cisco 12012 Performing a Basic Configuration Using Configuration Mode You can configure the Cisco 12012 system manually (via configuration mode) if you prefer not to use the setup facility. Use the following procedure to configure the Cisco 12012 system manually: Step 1 Connect a console terminal to the console port of your RP. Step 2 When you are asked if you want to enter the initial dialog, answer no to go into the normal operating mode of the Cisco 12012 as follows: Would you like to enter the initial dialog? [yes]: no Step 3 After a few seconds you will see the user EXEC prompt (Router>). Type enable to enter enable mode. Configuration changes can only be made in enable mode: Router> enable The prompt will change to the privileged EXEC prompt (#) as follows: Router# Step 4 At the enable prompt (#), enter the config terminal command to enter configuration mode from the terminal as follows: Router# config terminal Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z. Router(config)# At the prompt, enter the interface type slot/port command to enter interface configuration mode as follows: Router(config)# interface type slot/port Router(config-if)# In either of these configuration modes, you can enter any changes to the Cisco 12012 configuration. Press Ctrl-Z to exit either configuration mode. Step 5 Save your settings. (Refer to the section “Saving the Running Configuration Settings and Reviewing Your Configuration,” later in this chapter.) Your Cisco 12012 is now minimally configured and will boot with the configuration you entered. To see a list of the configuration commands available to you, enter ? at the prompt or press the help key while in configuration mode. 4-20 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Configuring the Cisco 12012 Checking the Running Configuration Settings before Saving Them You can check the configuration settings you entered or changes you made by entering show running-config command at the enable prompt (#) as follows: Router# show running-config . . . Router# Saving the Running Configuration Settings and Reviewing Your Configuration To store the configuration or changes to your startup configuration in NVRAM, enter copy running-config startup-config at the enable prompt (#) as follows: Router# copy running-config startup-config This command saves the configuration settings that you created in configuration mode. If you fail to do this, your configuration will be lost the next time you reload the system. To display information stored in NVRAM, use the show startup-config EXEC command. The following sample output shows a typical system configuration: Router# sh startup-config Using 1133 out of 520184 bytes ! version 11.2 no service udp-small-servers no service tcp-small-servers ! hostname Router ! enable password wilma ip cef distributed switch ip host biff 3.3.3.254 ! interface Ethernet0 ip address 3.3.1.1 255.255.0.0 no ip mroute-cache ! Observing System Startup and Performing a Basic Configuration 4-21 Configuring the Cisco 12012 interface POS3/0 ip address 2.1.1.1 255.0.0.0 no keepalive crc 16 no cdp enable ! interface POS3/1 ip address 2.1.1.2 255.0.0.0 no keepalive crc 16 no cdp enable ! interface POS3/2 ip address 2.1.1.3 255.0.0.0 no keepalive crc 32 no cdp enable ! interface POS3/3 ip address 2.1.1.4 255.0.0.0 no keepalive crc 32 no cdp enable ! interface ATM4/0 ip address 15.0.0.15 255.0.0.0 secondary ip address 1.1.1.2 255.0.0.0 atm pvc 1 0 64 aal5snap atm pvc 2 0 72 aal5mux ip 155000 155000 1 atm pvc 3 1 90 aal5snap 312000 312000 1 atm pvc 4 0 108 aal5snap atm pvc 10 0 144 aal5mux ip 155000 155000 1 atm pvc 11 1 91 aal5snap 310000 310000 1 map-group atm1 ! no ip classless ip route 2.5.4.254 255.255.255.255 Ethernet0 ! 4-22 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Implementing Other Configuration Tasks map-list atm1 ip 1.1.1.1 atm-vc 1 ip 1.1.1.3 atm-vc 2 ip 1.1.1.4 atm-vc 4 ip 15.0.0.1 atm-vc 3 ip 15.0.0.5 atm-vc 10 ip 15.0.0.6 atm-vc 11 no logging trap ! ! line con 0 exec-timeout 0 0 line aux 0 line vty 0 4 password bambam login ! end Implementing Other Configuration Tasks This section contains information on the following additional configuration, troubleshooting, and maintenance tasks: • • • • Configuring the Software Configuration Register Boot Field Settings and the boot Command Recovering a Lost Password Using Flash Memory Cards in the RP Observing System Startup and Performing a Basic Configuration 4-23 Implementing Other Configuration Tasks Configuring the Software Configuration Register The Cisco 12012 system uses a 16-bit software configuration register, which allows you to set specific system parameters. Settings for the software configuration register are written into NVRAM. Following are some reasons for changing the software configuration register settings: • • • • • • • • To select a boot source and default boot filename. • To force an automatic boot from the system bootstrap software (boot image) or from a default system image in onboard Flash memory, and read any boot system commands that are stored in the configuration file in NVRAM. To enable or disable the Break function. To control broadcast addresses. To set the console terminal baud rate. To load operating software from Flash memory. To enable booting from a Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server. To recover a lost password. To allow you to manually boot the system using the b command at the bootstrap program prompt. Table 4-3 lists the meaning of each of the software configuration memory bits, and Table 4-4 defines the boot field, which consists of bits 0 through 3 of the software configuration register and is specified as a binary number. Caution To avoid confusion and possibly halting the Cisco 12012, remember that valid configuration register settings might be combinations of settings and not just the individual settings listed in Table 4-3. For example, the factory default value of 0x0102 is a combination of settings. 4-24 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Implementing Other Configuration Tasks Table 4-3 Software Configuration Register Bit Meanings Bit Number1 Hexadecimal Meaning 00 to 03 0x0000 to 0x000F Boot field (see Table 4-4) 06 0x0040 Causes system software to ignore NVRAM contents 07 0x0080 OEM2 bit enabled 08 0x0100 Break disabled 09 0x0200 Use secondary bootstrap 10 0x0400 Internet Protocol (IP) broadcast with all zeros 11 to 12 0x0800 to 0x1000 Console line speed (default is 9600 baud) 13 0x2000 Boot default Flash software if network boot fails 14 0x4000 IP broadcasts do not have network numbers 15 0x8000 Enable diagnostic messages and ignore NVRAM contents 1. The factory default value for the configuration register is 0x0102. This value is a combination of the following: binary bit 8 = 0x0100 and binary bits 00 through 03 = 0x0002 (see Table 4-4). 2. OEM = original equipment manufacturer. Table 4-4 Explanation of Boot Field (Configuration Register Bits 00 to 03) Boot Field Meaning 00 Stays at the system bootstrap prompt 01 Boots the first system image in onboard Flash memory 02 to 0F Specifies a default filename for booting over the network. Enables boot system commands that override the default filename. Observing System Startup and Performing a Basic Configuration 4-25 Implementing Other Configuration Tasks Boot Field Settings and the boot Command Bits 0 through 3 of the software configuration register form the boot field, specified as a binary number. Note The factory default configuration register setting for systems and RP spares is 0x0102. When the boot field is set to either 0 or 1 (0-0-0-0 or 0-0-0-1), the system ignores any boot instructions in the system configuration file and the following occurs: • When the boot field is set to 0, you must boot the operating system manually by issuing the boot command to the system bootstrap program or rom monitor. • When the boot field is set to 1, the system boots the first image in the onboard bootflash single in-line memory module (SIMM). You can enter the boot command only, or include additional boot instructions with the command such as the name of a file stored in Flash memory or a file that you specify for booting from a network server. If you use the boot command without specifying a file or any other boot instructions, the system boots from the default Flash image (the first image in onboard Flash memory). Otherwise, you can instruct the system to boot from a specific Flash image (using the boot system flash filename command), or boot from a network server by sending broadcast TFTP requests (using the boot system filename command), or send a direct TFTP request to a specific server (using the boot system filename ip-address command). You can also use the boot command to boot images stored in the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association (PCMCIA) Flash memory cards located in PCMCIA slot 0 or slot 1 on the RP. If you set the boot field to any bit pattern other than 0 or 1, the system uses the resulting number to form a filename for booting over the network. To form this filename, the system starts with cisco and links the octal equivalent of the boot field value and the processor type in the following format: cisco-; for example, cisco2-grp. The system uses this filename to invoke the system image by booting over the net. However, if the configuration file contains any boot instructions, the system uses those boot instructions instead of the filename it computed from the configuration register settings. 4-26 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Implementing Other Configuration Tasks Note If a bootable Cisco IOS software image exists in a Flash memory card installed in PCMCIA slot 0 or slot 1, the configuration register setting is overridden and the bootable Cisco IOS software image will be booted instead of the default TFTP-bootable Cisco IOS software image (cisco2-grp through cisco17-grp on the GRP and cisco2-prp through cisco17-prp on the PRP). You must set the boot field for the boot functions you require. Changing Configuration Register Settings Use the following procedure to change the configuration register while running the system software: Step 1 Enter the enable command and your password to enter privileged level as follows: Router> enable Password: Router# Step 2 Enter the configure terminal command at the privileged-level system prompt (#), also called the enabled prompt. You are prompted, as shown in the following example: Router# conf t Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z. Router(config)# Step 3 Set the contents of the configuration register by entering the config-register value configuration command, where value is a hexadecimal number preceded by 0x (see Table 4-3), as in the following: Router(config)# config-register 0xvalue Step 4 Exit configuration mode by entering Ctrl-Z. The new value settings are saved to memory; however, the new settings do not take effect until the system software is reloaded by rebooting the system. Observing System Startup and Performing a Basic Configuration 4-27 Implementing Other Configuration Tasks Step 5 Display the configuration register value currently in effect and that will be used at the next reload by entering the show version EXEC command. The value is displayed on the last line of the screen display, as in the following example: Configuration register is 0x141 (will be 0x102 at next reload) Step 6 Save your settings. (Refer to the section “Saving the Running Configuration Settings and Reviewing Your Configuration,” later in this chapter. However, note that configuration register changes take effect only after the system reloads, such as when you issue a reload command from the console.) Step 7 Reboot the system. The new configuration register value takes effect with the next system boot. This completes the procedure for making configuration register changes. Configuration Register Bit Meanings The lowest four bits of the software configuration register (bits 3, 2, 1, and 0) form the boot field. (See Table 4-4.) The boot field specifies a number in binary form. If you set the boot field value to 0, you must boot the operating system manually by entering the b command at the bootstrap prompt (>). If you set the boot field value to 0x2 through 0xF and there is a valid boot system command stored in the configuration file, the system boots the Cisco IOS software as directed by that value. If there is no boot system command, the Cisco 12012 forms a default boot filename for booting from a network server. (See Table 4-5 for the format of these default filenames.) In the following example, the software configuration register is set to boot the system from onboard Flash memory and to ignore Break at the next reboot of the system: Router# conf term Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z. Router(config)# config-register 0x0102 Router(config)# boot system flash [filename] Ctrl-z Router# The server creates a default boot filename as part of the automatic configuration process. To form the boot filename, the server starts with the name cisco and adds the octal equivalent of the boot field number, a hyphen, and the processor-type name (grp or prp). 4-28 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Implementing Other Configuration Tasks Table 4-5 lists the default boot filenames. A boot system configuration command in the configuration file in NVRAM overrides the default filename created for booting over the network. Note If a bootable Cisco IOS software image exists in a Flash memory card installed in PCMCIA slot 0 or slot 1, the configuration register setting is overridden and the bootable Cisco IOS software image will be booted instead of the default TFTP-bootable Cisco IOS software image (cisco2-grp through cisco17-grp on the GRP and cisco2-prp through cisco17-prp on the PRP). Table 4-5 Default Boot Filenames Action/File Name Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bootstrap mode 0 0 0 0 Default software 0 0 0 1 cisco2-grp or cisco2-prp 0 0 1 0 cisco3-grp or cisco3-prp 0 0 1 1 cisco4-grp or cisco4-prp 0 1 0 0 cisco5-grp or cisco5-prp 0 1 0 1 cisco6-grp or cisco6-prp 0 1 1 0 cisco7-grp or cisco7-prp 0 1 1 1 cisco10-grp or cisco10-prp 1 0 0 0 cisco11-grp or cisco11-prp 1 0 0 1 cisco12-grp or cisco12-prp 1 0 1 0 cisco13-grp or cisco13-prp 1 0 1 1 cisco14-grp or cisco14-prp 1 1 0 0 cisco15-grp or cisco15-prp 1 1 0 1 cisco16-grp or cisco16-prp 1 1 1 0 cisco17-grp or cisco17-prp 1 1 1 1 Observing System Startup and Performing a Basic Configuration 4-29 Implementing Other Configuration Tasks Bit 8 controls the console Break key. Setting bit 8 (the factory default) causes the system to ignore the console Break key. Clearing bit 8 causes the system to interpret the Break key as a command and to force the system into the bootstrap monitor, thereby halting normal operation. Regardless of the setting of the break enable bit, a break will cause a return to the ROM monitor during the first few seconds (approximately five seconds) of booting. Bit 9 is unused. Bit 10 controls the host portion of the IP broadcast address. Setting bit 10 causes the processor to use all zeros; clearing bit 10 (the factory default) causes the processor to use all ones. Bit 10 interacts with bit 14, which controls the network and subnet portions of the broadcast address. Table 4-6 shows the combined effect of bits 10 and 14. Table 4-6 Configuration Register Settings for Broadcast Address Destination Bit 14 Bit 10 Address ( ) Off Off Off On On On On Off Bits 11 and 12 in the configuration register determine the data transmission rate of the console terminal. Table 4-7 shows the bit settings for the four available rates. (The factory-set default data transmission rate is 9600.) Table 4-7 System Console Terminal Transmission Rate Settings Baud Bit 12 Bit 11 9600 0 0 4800 0 1 1200 1 0 2400 1 1 4-30 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Implementing Other Configuration Tasks Bit 13 determines the server response to a bootload failure. Setting bit 13 causes the server to load operating software from Flash memory after five unsuccessful attempts to load a boot file from the network. Clearing bit 13 causes the server to continue attempting to load a boot file from the network indefinitely. By factory default, bit 13 is cleared to 0. Recovering a Lost Password This section provides information on how to recover a lost password. Following is an overview: • Enter the show version command to note the existing software configuration register value. • • Break to the bootstrap program prompt. Change the configuration register to ignore NVRAM. Note A key to recovering a lost password is to set the configuration register so that the contents of NVRAM are ignored (0x0040), allowing you to see your password. • • • Enter privileged level in the system EXEC. Enter the show startup-config command to display the enable password. Change the configuration register value back to its original setting. Use the following procedure to recover a lost password. Note If the enable password is encrypted, the following procedure will not work for password recovery and you will have to reconfigure the system; you will be unable to reboot it. To reconfigure the system, use the displayed configuration, which is shown using the show startup-config EXEC command (see in Step 11). Observing System Startup and Performing a Basic Configuration 4-31 Implementing Other Configuration Tasks Step 1 Attach an ASCII terminal to the RP console port. Step 2 Configure the terminal to operate at 9600 bps, 8 data bits, no parity, 2 stop bits (or to whatever settings the console port is set). Step 3 Enter the show version command to display the existing configuration register value. Note this value for later use in Step 13. Step 4 If Break is disabled, power cycle the Cisco 12012. (To power cycle, turn off power, wait five seconds, and then turn it on again.) If Break is enabled on the router, press the Break key or send a break by holding down the Control key and pressing the right square bracket key (^]), then proceed to Step 5. Step 5 Within five seconds of turning on the router, press the Break key. This action causes the terminal to display the bootstrap program prompt as follows: rommon 1> Step 6 Set the configuration register to ignore the configuration file information as follows: rommon 1> confreg Configuration Summary enabled are: console baud: 9600 boot: image specified by the boot system command or default to: cisco2-grp do you enable enable enable enable enable enable change change wish to change the configuration? y/n [n]: y “diagnostic mode”? y/n [n]: “use net in IP bcast address”? y/n [n]: “load rom after netbootfails”? y/n [n]: “use all zero broadcast”? y/n [n]: “break/abort has effect?” y/n [n]: “ignore system config info?” [n]: y console baud rate? y/n [n]: boot characteristics? y/n [n] Configuration Summary enabled are: console baud: 9600 boot: image specified by the boot system command or default to: cisco2-grp 4-32 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Implementing Other Configuration Tasks do you wish to change the configuration? y/n [n] You must reset or power cycle for the new config to take effect Step 7 Initialize the router by entering the i command as follows: rommon 1> i The router will power cycle, the configuration register will be set to ignore the configuration file, and the router will boot the boot system image and prompt you with the system configuration dialog as follows: --- System Configuration Dialog --- Step 8 Enter no in response to the system configuration dialog prompts until the following system message is displayed: Press RETURN to get started! Step 9 Press Return. After some interface information displays, the prompt appears as follows: Router> Step 10 Enter the enable command to enter enabled mode. The prompt changes to the following: Router# Step 11 Enter the show start-up config EXEC command to display the enable password in the configuration file. Step 12 Enter the configure terminal command at the EXEC prompt. You are prompted as follows: Router# configure terminal Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z. Router(config)# Step 13 Change the configuration register value back to its original value (noted from Step 3) or change it to a value of 0x0102 (factory default) using the config-register 0x value command. Observing System Startup and Performing a Basic Configuration 4-33 Implementing Other Configuration Tasks Step 14 Exit configuration mode by entering Ctrl-Z. Step 15 Reboot the router and enable it using the recovered password. This completes the procedure for recovering a lost password. Using Flash Memory Cards in the RP This section describes procedures for using Flash memory cards in the Route Processor (RP), and contains information on the following Flash memory card functions: • • • • • • • • • • Installing and Removing the Flash Memory Card in a RP Formatting a Flash Memory Card Specifying the Cisco IOS Image Used to Boot the System Software Commands Associated with Flash Memory Enabling Booting from Flash Memory Copying Files to Flash Memory Copying a Cisco IOS Software Image into a Flash Memory Card Copying Cisco IOS Software Images between Flash Memory Cards Copying System Configuration Files Between RP Memory and a Flash Memory Card Recovering from Locked Blocks in Flash Memory Cards Installing and Removing the Flash Memory Card in a RP The RP has two PCMCIA slots—slot 0 and slot 1—into which you can install a Flash memory card. The slots are positioned with slot 0 on the left and slot 1 on the right (refer to Figure 4-2). Both slots can be used at the same time. The following procedure is a generic one and can be used for a Flash memory card in either slot position. 4-34 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Implementing Other Configuration Tasks Use the following procedure to install and remove a Flash memory card: Step 1 Facing the RP front panel, hold the Flash memory card with the connector end of the card toward the slot and the label facing right. Note The Flash memory card is keyed and cannot be seated the wrong way. The ejector button will not pop out if the card is not properly inserted. Step 2 Insert the card into the appropriate slot until the card completely seats in the connector at the back of the slot and the ejector button pops out toward you (see Figure 4-2b). Note that the card does not insert all the way inside the RP; a portion of the card remains outside of the slot. Do not attempt to force the card past this point. Step 3 To eject the card, press the appropriate ejector button until the card is free of the connector at the back of the slot. (See Figure 4-2c.) Step 4 Remove the card from the slot and place it in an antistatic bag to protect it. Observing System Startup and Performing a Basic Configuration 4-35 Implementing Other Configuration Tasks Figure 4-2 Installing and Removing a Flash Memory Card a T EC EJ -1 OT SL -0 OT SL b X AU T SE RE T EC EJ c -1 OT SL -0 OT SL X AU T SE RE T EC EJ X AU T SE RE H10703 -1 OT SL -0 OT SL 4-36 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Implementing Other Configuration Tasks Formatting a Flash Memory Card The Flash memory card that shipped with your router contains the Cisco IOS software image you need to boot your router. In some cases, you might need to insert a new Flash memory card and copy images or backup configuration files onto it. Before you can use a new Flash memory card, you must format it. Note The following procedure assumes you have already booted your router. Use only Type 1 or Type 2 Flash memory cards. Caution The following formatting procedure erases all information on the Flash memory card. To prevent the loss of important data that might be stored on a Flash memory card, proceed carefully. If you want to save the data on a Flash memory card, copy the data to a server before you format the card. Use the following procedure to format a new Flash memory card: Step 1 Insert the Flash memory card into slot 0. (Use the procedure in the section “Installing and Removing the Flash Memory Card in a RP,” earlier in this chapter.) If slot 0 is not available, use slot 1. Step 2 Enter the format slot0: (or format slot1:) command as follows: Router# format slot0: All sectors will be erased, proceed? [confirm] Enter volume id (up to 30 characters): MyNewCard Formatting sector 1 Format device slot0 completed Router# Note For this example, a 20-MB Flash memory card was used and at the line “Formatting sector,” the system counts backward from 160 to 1. The new Flash memory card is now formatted and ready to use. Observing System Startup and Performing a Basic Configuration 4-37 Implementing Other Configuration Tasks For complete command descriptions and configuration information, refer to the Configuration Fundamentals Command Reference and the Configuration Fundamentals Configuration Guide. (For information on obtaining these publications, refer to the section “If You Need More Configuration Information,” later in this chapter.) Specifying the Cisco IOS Image Used to Boot the System Use the following series of commands to specify that a Cisco IOS software image is bootable. (In this example, the file named new.image.) Note that, since the configuration register must be set to 0x2102, the config-register command is part of the sequence. Router# config terminal Router(config)# no boot system Router(config)# boot system flash slot0:new.image Router(config)# config-register 0x2102 Ctrl-z Router# copy running-config startup-config Router# reload When the system reloads, it will boot the Cisco IOS software image from the Flash memory card in slot 0. Note In the preceding example, the configuration register value 0x2000 instructs the system to boot a default Cisco IOS software image from Flash memory if a network boot fails, the value 0x0100 instructs the system to ignore a break, and the value 0x0002 instructs the system to look in Flash memory for this default Cisco IOS software image. Software Commands Associated with Flash Memory Following are software commands related to the onboard Flash memory on the RP and the Flash memory cards. You can determine which memory media you are accessing using the pwd command as follows: Router# pwd slot0 4-38 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Implementing Other Configuration Tasks You can move between Flash memory media using the cd device-name command, where device-name can be slot0:, slot1:, or bootflash:. Examples follow: Router# Router# slot1 Router# Router# slot0 cd slot1: pwd cd slot0: pwd You can list the directory of Flash memory media using the dir [device-name] command, where device-name can be slot0:, slot1:, or bootflash:. An example of the dir command follows: Router# dir -#- -length1 4601977 6 679 7 1 -----date/time-----May 10 1997 09:42:19 May 10 1997 05:43:56 May 10 1997 09:54:53 name myfile1 todays–config fun1 You can delete a file from any Flash memory media using the delete filename command, where filename is any file within Flash memory. An example of deleting the file fun1 from the Flash memory card in slot 0 follows: Router# delete fun1 Router# dir -#- -length- -----date/time------ name 1 4601977 May 10 1997 09:42:19 myfile1 6 679 May 10 1997 05:43:56 todays–config Files that are deleted are marked as deleted, but still occupy space in Flash memory. The squeeze device-name command (where device-name can be slot0:, slot1:, or bootflash:) removes them permanently and pushes all other undeleted files together to eliminate spaces between them. An example of the squeeze command follows: Router# squeeze slot0: All deleted files will be removed, proceed? [confirm] Squeeze operation may take a while, proceed? [confirm] ebESZ To prevent loss of data due to sudden power loss, the “squeezed” data is temporarily saved to another location of Flash memory, which is specially used by the system. Observing System Startup and Performing a Basic Configuration 4-39 Implementing Other Configuration Tasks In the preceding command display output, the character “e” means this special location has been erased (which must be performed before any write operation). The character “b” means that the data that is about to be written to this special location has been temporarily copied. The character “E” signifies that the sector that was temporarily occupied by the data has been erased. The character “S” signifies that the data was written to its permanent location in Flash memory. The squeeze command operation keeps a log of which of these functions has been performed so upon sudden power failure, it can return to the correct place and continue with the process. The character “Z” means this log was erased after the successful squeeze command operation. The configuration register setting 0x0101 tells the system to boot the default image (the first image) from onboard Flash memory, but not reset the Break disable or check for a default filename to be booted over the network. The configuration register setting 0x0102 tells the system to boot from Flash memory if netboot fails, disable Break, and check for a default netboot filename. For more information on the copy tftp:filename [bootflash: | slot0: | slot1: ]:filename command and other related commands, refer to the set of configuration fundamentals configuration and reference publications. Enabling Booting from Flash Memory To enable booting from Flash memory, set configuration register bits 3, 2, 1, and 0 to a value between 2 and 15 in conjunction with the boot system flash device:filename configuration command, where device is bootflash:, slot0:, or slot1:, and filename is the name of the file from which you want to boot the system. (For a detailed configuration register information, refer to the section “Manually Booting the System,” earlier in this chapter.) To enter configuration mode while in the system software image and specify a Flash filename from which to boot, enter the configure terminal command at the enable prompt as follows: Router# configure terminal Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z. Router(config)# boot system flash device:filename 4-40 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Implementing Other Configuration Tasks To disable Break and enable the boot system flash device:filename command, enter the config-register command with the value shown in the following example: Router(config)# config-reg 0x0102 Ctrl-z Router# Copying Files to Flash Memory Copying a new Cisco IOS software image to Flash memory might be required whenever a new Cisco IOS software release or maintenance release becomes available. Copying a system configuration file might also be required if you want to keep a backup copy of it. Use the information in this section to copy any type of file to Flash memory. Caution You cannot copy a new Cisco IOS software image into Flash memory while the system is running from Flash memory. Note In general, we recommend that you upgrade Cisco IOS software images in Flash memory one at a time; do not delete all known-good images at one time. Also, upgrade PCMCIA-based Flash memory separately from onboard Flash memory to avoid losing important Cisco IOS software images that are known to be good. (The onboard Flash memory is referred to as the bootflash.) Use the command copy tftp:filename [ bootflash: | slot0: | slot1: ]:filename for the copy procedure, where tftp:filename is the source of the file, and [ bootflash: | slot0: | slot1: ]:filename is the destination in onboard Flash memory or on either of the Flash memory cards. Observing System Startup and Performing a Basic Configuration 4-41 Implementing Other Configuration Tasks An example of the copy tftp:filename command follows: Router# copy tftp:myfile1 slot0:myfile1 20575008 bytes available on device slot0, proceed? [confirm] Address or name of remote host [1.1.1.1]? Loading new.image from 1.1.1.1 (via Ethernet0): !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! [OK - 7799951/15599616 bytes] CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC Router# In the preceding example, the exclamation points (!!!) appear as the file is downloaded, and the “C” characters signify calculation of the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) value, which is a verification that the file has been correctly downloaded to the Flash memory card. Copying a Cisco IOS Software Image into a Flash Memory Card You can copy a Cisco IOS software image into Flash memory; however, you must first format the Flash memory card and make the image in the Flash memory card bootable. (If you have not already done this, refer to the sections “Formatting a Flash Memory Card” and “Specifying the Cisco IOS Image Used to Boot the System,” which appear earlier in this chapter.) To copy a Cisco IOS software image, use the following procedure, which assumes the following: • • You have a formatted Flash memory card in your RP You have a good, bootable Cisco IOS software image in the onboard Flash memory so you can start the router 4-42 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Implementing Other Configuration Tasks • The bootable Cisco IOS software image you want to copy to the Flash memory card exists on a TFTP server to which you have access (meaning you know its name and have connectivity to it), and at least one interface is available to access this server To assure access to a TFTP server, you need to configure one interface using the setup command facility. For instructions on using this facility, refer to the section “Performing a Basic Manual Configuration Using the Setup Facility or the setup Command,” earlier in this chapter, or to the Configuration Fundamentals Configuration Guide publication. • You know the filename of the image you want to copy into the Flash memory card Use the following procedure to copy a bootable image into the Flash memory card: Step 1 Boot the router and allow it to initialize. Step 2 Enable the router and copy the image new.image to the Flash memory card in slot 0, using the following series of commands: Router> en Password: Router# copy tftp:new.image slot0:new.image 20575008 bytes available on device slot0, proceed? [confirm] Address or name of remote host [1.1.1.1]? Loading new.image from 1.1.1.1 (via Ethernet0): !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! [OK - 7799951/15599616 bytes] CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC CCCCCCCC Router# In the preceding example, the exclamation points (!!!) appear as the file is downloaded, and the “C” characters signify calculation of the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) value, which is a verification that the file has been correctly downloaded to the Flash memory card. You must now reboot the system. This completes the procedure for copying a bootable image into a Flash memory card. Observing System Startup and Performing a Basic Configuration 4-43 Implementing Other Configuration Tasks Copying Cisco IOS Software Images between Flash Memory Cards As future releases of Cisco IOS software become available, you will receive these images either as a file booted from a network server, a file on floppy disk, or a file on a Flash memory card. The following scenario describes how to use a newly released Cisco IOS software image on a Flash memory card in a system that has an older image on a Flash memory card in slot 0 and a default boot Cisco IOS software image in the onboard Flash memory. For this scenario, the filenames are as follows: • • • The new image on the new Flash memory card is image.new. The old image in the Flash memory card in slot 0 is image.old. The bootable image in onboard Flash memory is image.boot. (Use the Cisco IOS software image used by default to boot the system if no other images are available.) You will copy the new Cisco IOS software image from the new Flash memory card onto the Flash memory card that contains the old Cisco IOS software image. Note The scenario assumes that the new Cisco IOS software image will fit on the Flash memory card in slot 0, alongside the old image. If there is not enough available space, use the delete command to delete files from the Flash memory card to make sufficient room for the new Cisco IOS software image; however, do not delete the image.old file. Then use the squeeze command to remove these deleted files from the Flash memory card. (For information on the squeeze command, refer to the section “Software Commands Associated with Flash Memory,” earlier in this chapter.) If, after you have deleted files and used the squeeze command, the two files cannot coexist on the Flash memory card in slot 0, remove this card (place it in an antistatic bag and store it in a safe place), then insert the new Flash memory card (with the file image.new) in slot 0. Proceed to Step 5 and use the command boot system flash slot0:image.new to designate the file image.new as the default boot Cisco IOS software image. 4-44 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Implementing Other Configuration Tasks Use the following procedure to copy bootable Cisco IOS software images between Flash memory cards: Step 1 Boot the router. (For this example, the file image.boot will be used by default.) Step 2 Enable the router as follows: Router> en Password: Router# Step 3 Insert the new Flash memory card in slot 1. Step 4 Use the following command to copy the file image.new in slot 1 to the Flash memory card in slot 0, only if there is enough memory space for the two images to coexist: Router# copy slot1:image.new slot0:image.new You can also enter the previous command as copy slot1:image.new slot0:. Step 5 Use the following series of commands to designate the file image.new (in the Flash memory card in slot 0) as the default boot image: Router# config t Router(config)# no boot system Router(config)# boot system flash slot0:image.new Ctrl-z Router# copy running-config startup-config Router# reload When the system reloads, it will boot the file image.new from the Flash memory card in slot 0. This completes the procedure for copying bootable images between Flash memory cards. Observing System Startup and Performing a Basic Configuration 4-45 Implementing Other Configuration Tasks Copying System Configuration Files Between RP Memory and a Flash Memory Card Copying a configuration file to a Flash memory card in PCMCIA slot 0 or slot 1 might be required if you do not have access to a TFTP server on which you can temporarily store your configuration file. You can then copy the configuration file back to NVRAM at any time. You can copy your startup configuration file (from NVRAM) or your running configuration file (from DRAM). Use the procedures in the following sections to first copy the configuration file from either NVRAM or DRAM to a Flash memory card, and then to copy the configuration file from a Flash memory card back to NVRAM. Note You cannot copy files directly into DRAM. Copying a Configuration File from RP NVRAM to a Flash Memory Card You can use the command copy startup-config [ slot0: | slot1: ]:filename for the copy procedure where startup-config is the file’s source (NVRAM), and [slot0: | slot1: ]:filename is the file’s destination in either of the Flash memory cards. Note that the environmental variable CONFIG_FILE must be pointing (set) to NVRAM, which is the system default. Use the following procedure to copy a configuration file from RP NVRAM to a Flash memory card: Step 1 Use the show boot command to display the current setting for the environmental variable CONFIG_FILE as follows: Router# show boot (display text omitted) CONFIG_FILE variable = Current CONFIG_FILE variable = (display text omitted) The preceding example shows that the environmental variable CONFIG_FILE is set for NVRAM, by default. 4-46 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Implementing Other Configuration Tasks Step 2 Enter the copy startup-config slot0:filename command as follows: Router# copy startup-config slot0:myfile2 20575008 bytes available on device slot0, proceed? [confirm] Address or name of remote host [1.1.1.1]? Loading new.image from 1.1.1.1 (via Ethernet0): !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! [OK - 7799951/15599616 bytes] CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC CCCCCCCC Router# Note In the preceding example, the exclamation points (!!!) appear as the file is copied. The “C” characters signify calculation of the checksum—a verification that the file has been correctly copied. You can also copy the running configuration (located in DRAM) to a Flash memory card, as shown in the following section “Copying a Configuration File from RP DRAM to a Flash Memory Card.” Step 3 Verify the file was copied correctly using the dir command as follows: Router# dir slot0: -#- -length- -----date/time-----1 5200084 May 10 1997 19:24:12 3 1215 May 10 1997 20:30:52 4 6176844 May 10 1997 23:04:10 5 1186 May 10 1997 16:56:50 name gsr-p-mz.112-8 myfile1 gsr-p-mz.112-8.1 myfile2 9197156 bytes available (11381148 bytes used) Router# This completes the procedure for copying a configuration file between RP NVRAM and a Flash memory card. Observing System Startup and Performing a Basic Configuration 4-47 Implementing Other Configuration Tasks Copying a Configuration File from RP DRAM to a Flash Memory Card You can use the command copy running-config [ slot0: | slot1: ]:filename for the copy procedure where running-config is the file’s source (the temporary configuration in DRAM), and [slot0: | slot1: ]:filename is the file’s destination in either of the Flash memory cards. An example of the copy startup-config slot0:filename command follows: Router# copy running-config slot0:myfile2 20575008 bytes available on device slot0, proceed? [confirm] Address or name of remote host [1.1.1.1]? Loading new.image from 1.1.1.1 (via Ethernet0): !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!![OK - 7799951/15599616 bytes] CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC Router# In the preceding example, the exclamation points (!!!) appear as the file is copied. The “C” characters signify calculation of the checksum—a verification that the file has been correctly copied. Use the dir command to verify the file was copied correctly as follows: Router# dir slot0: -#- -length- -----date/time-----1 5200084 May 10 1997 19:24:12 3 1215 May 10 1997 20:30:52 4 6176844 May 10 1997 23:04:10 5 1186 May 10 1997 16:56:50 name gsr-p-mz.112-8 myfile1 gsr-p-mz.112-8.1 myfile2 9197156 bytes available (11381148 bytes used) This completes the procedure for copying a configuration file from RP DRAM to a Flash memory card. 4-48 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Implementing Other Configuration Tasks Copying a Configuration File from a Flash Memory Card to RP NVRAM Following is the procedure for copying your configuration file from the Flash memory card in PCMCIA slot 0 or slot 1 back to NVRAM. Use the command copy [ slot0: | slot1: ]:filename startup-config for this copy procedure, where [slot0 | slot1 ]:filename is the source of the file (Flash memory card), and startup-config is the destination (NVRAM). An example of the copy slot0:filename startup-config command follows: Router# copy slot0:myfile startup-config [ok] Router# Use the copy startup-config running-config command to ensure that the startup configuration file, now stored in NVRAM, is the default running configuration file used by the system as follows: Router# copy startup-config running-config Router# %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from memory by console Router# This completes the procedure for copying a configuration file from the Flash memory card to NVRAM. Recovering from Locked Blocks in Flash Memory Cards A locked block in Flash memory cards occurs when power is lost or a Flash memory card is unplugged during a write or erase operation. When a block of Flash memory is locked, it cannot be written to or erased, and the operation will consistently fail at a particular block location. The only way to recover from locked blocks is to reformat the Flash memory card with the format command. Caution Formatting a Flash memory card will cause existing data to be lost. Observing System Startup and Performing a Basic Configuration 4-49 What To Do Next? What To Do Next? After you have installed the Cisco 12012 hardware, checked all external connections, turned on the system power, allowed the system to boot up, and minimally configured the system, you might need to perform more complete and complex configurations that are beyond the scope of this text. For specific information on more complex system and interface configuration, and, if necessary, troubleshooting, refer to the publications listed in the section “If You Need More Configuration Information.” Note For additional basic configuration information on each of the line cards available for the Cisco 12012, refer to the individual configuration notes that shipped with your line cards. If You Need More Configuration Information The Cisco IOS software running the Cisco 12012 system contains extensive features and functionality. The effective use of many of many of these features is easier if you have more information at hand. To obtain information about documentation, refer to the following: • The Documentation CD-ROM. Cisco documentation and additional literature are available in a CD-ROM package, which ships with your product. The Documentation CD-ROM, a member of the Cisco Connection Family, is updated monthly. Therefore, it might be more up to date than printed documentation. To order additional copies of the Documentation CD-ROM, contact your local sales representative or call customer service. The CD-ROM package is available as a single package or as an annual subscription. • • The section “Obtaining Technical Assistance” in the chapter “About This Guide.” • The Cisco Information Packet that shipped with your router. Customer Service at 800 553-6387 or 408 526-7208. Customer Service hours are 5:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. Pacific time, Monday through Friday (excluding company holidays). You can also send e-mail to [email protected]. 4-50 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide If You Need More Configuration Information • For systems with Cisco IOS Release 11.2(8)GS or later, refer to the following modular configuration and modular command reference publications, as appropriate for your configuration: — Configuration Fundamentals Configuration Guide — Configuration Fundamentals Command Reference — Wide-Area Networking Configuration Guide — Wide-Area Networking Command Reference — Network Protocols Configuration Guide, Parts 1, 2, and 3 — Network Protocols Command Reference, Parts 1, 2, and 3 — Configuration Builder Getting Started Guide — Troubleshooting Internetworking Systems — Debug Command Reference — System Error Messages — Cisco IOS Software Command Summary — Cisco Management Information Base (MIB) User Quick Reference • For additional line card interface configuration information, refer to the following: — The configuration note Quad OC-3c/STM-1c Packet-Over-SONET Line Card Installation and Configuration (Document Number 78-4333-xx) your Quad OC-3c/STM-c1 POS line card — The configuration note OC-12c/STM-4c Packet-Over-SONET Line Card Installation and Configuration (Document Number 78-4341-xx) that accompanied your OC-12c/STM-4c POS line card — The configuration note OC-12c/STM-4c Asynchronous Transfer Mode Line Card Installation and Configuration (Document Number 78-4344-xx) that accompanied your OC-12c/STM-4c ATM line card • For additional GRP information, refer to the configuration note Gigabit Route Processor (GRP) Installation and Configuration (Document Number 78-4339-xx) that accompanied your GRP. Observing System Startup and Performing a Basic Configuration 4-51 If You Need More Configuration Information • For additional PRP information, refer to the configuration note Performance Route Processor (PRP) Installation and Configuration (Document Number 78-13302-xx) that accompanied your PRP. 4-52 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide CHAPTER 5 Troubleshooting the Installation Your Cisco 12012 went through extensive testing and burn-in before leaving the factory. However, if you encounter problems starting up the router, use the information in this chapter to help isolate the cause of the problems. This chapter contains the following sections: • • • • • Troubleshooting Overview Troubleshooting the Power Subsystem Troubleshooting the Processor Subsystem Troubleshooting the Cooling Subsystem Additional Reference Information for Troubleshooting The procedures in this chapter assume that you are troubleshooting the initial Cisco 12012 system startup, and that the system is in the original factory configuration. If you have removed or replaced components or changed any default settings, the recommendations in this chapter might not apply. At the initial system boot, you should verify the following: • • • • External power cables are connected, and proper source power is being supplied. The system blower modules are operating. The Cisco IOS software boots successfully. The RP and line cards are properly installed in their slots, and each initializes (is enabled by the system software) without problems. Troubleshooting the Installation 5-1 Troubleshooting Overview If you are unable to easily solve a problem, contact a service representative for assistance and further instructions. Before you call, have the following information ready to help your service provider assist you as quickly as possible: • • The date you received the router and the system serial number. The line cards you have installed. (Use the show hardware command to determine this.) • The type of Cisco IOS software running and its release number. (Use the show version command to determine this.) • A brief description of the problem you are having and the steps you have already taken to isolate and resolve the problem. • Any maintenance agreement or warranty information. Troubleshooting Overview This section describes the troubleshooting methods used in this chapter and describes how the Cisco 12012 is divided into subsystems for more efficient problem solving. Problem Solving with Subsystems The key to solving problems in the system is to try to isolate the problem to a specific subsystem. The first step in solving startup problems is to compare what the system is doing to what it should be doing. Since a startup problem is usually attributable to a single component, it is more efficient to first isolate the problem to a subsystem rather than troubleshoot each component in the system. 5-2 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Troubleshooting Overview For the troubleshooting procedures in this chapter, the Cisco 12012 consists of the following subsystems: • Power subsystem—consists of the following components: — AC-input power supplies or DC-input power supplies. The Cisco 12012 can be configured for source AC power or source DC power. A minimally configured Cisco 12012 system operating with source AC power has two AC-input power supplies installed. Adding a third and fourth AC-input power supply provides power supply redundancy and current sharing among the power supplies. A Cisco 12012 system operating with source DC power has one DC-input power supply installed. Adding a second DC-input power supply provides power supply redundancy and current sharing between the power supplies. Do not mix AC-input power supplies and DC-input power supplies in a Cisco 12012. Caution — DC-DC converters. A DC-DC converter is installed on each card in the upper and lower card cages. The converter is under control of the MBus module, another component on each card. The DC-DC converter takes –48 VDC and converts it into +3.3 VDC and +5 VDC for use by the card circuitry. — Harnesses. Two harnesses link the backplane with the two blower modules. • Cooling subsystem—comprises the two blower modules, which includes the individual blowers, the blower speed control card, the faceplate LEDs, and the air filter. The two blower modules should be operating whenever the system power is on. The variable speed feature in the Cisco 12012 allows a blower to operate at a slower speed and provide quieter operation when the internal system temperature is within the normal operating range. If the internal temperature exceeds a specific temperature, the blower speed increases to move more cooling air through the system. As a result, it might be difficult to determine whether or not the blower is operating in noisy, air-conditioned rooms. If you determine that the blower is not operating, contact a service representative immediately; there are no installation adjustments that you can make. Troubleshooting the Installation 5-3 Troubleshooting Overview • Processor subsystem—includes the Route Processor RP, and all line cards. Each card has an onboard processor. The RP downloads a copy of the Cisco IOS image to each line card processor. A line card or RP that is partially installed in the backplane might cause the system to hang and crash. Two 4-character alphanumeric LED displays at the bottom of each line card or RP faceplate display status and error messages, which can aid in troubleshooting. Identifying Startup Problems Startup problems are commonly due to source power or to a card not properly seated in the backplane. Although an overtemperature condition is unlikely at initial startup, the environmental monitoring functions are included in this chapter because they also monitor internal voltages. When you start up the router for the first time, you should observe the startup sequence. This section contains a description of the normal startup sequence as follows: • Each card in the system has an MBus module and at least one DC-DC converter. Each MBus module controls the DC-DC converter. The MBus module receives +5 VDC directly from the power supplies through the backplane. When the power supply power switches are turned on, each MBus module boots from an onboard electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM) device. Each MBus module processor reads a set of identification pins on the card to the backplane connector telling the MBus module processor what kind of card it is mounted on, which in turn, determines how the MBus module will function. • The clock and scheduler card (CSC), containing the system clock, immediately powers up. • The MBus module on the RP monitors the progress of the clock and scheduler card power up. When the CSC has powered up, the MBus module on the RP turns on its DC-DC converter powering up the RP. 5-4 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Troubleshooting Overview • The RP sends the instructions to each line card to power up. Each line card processor begins to perform its own boot process. Each line card, through its MBus module, notifies the RP when the boot process is complete. • The RP sends a command to each switch fabric card to power up. As each switch fabric card powers up, its progress is monitored by its MBus module processor. When the power-up process is complete, the switch fabric card MBus module notifies the RP that the switch fabric card is online. As the boot process progresses for each card, the card’s status is displayed in the alphanumeric LED displays. The top display is powered by the DC-DC converter on the card; the bottom display is powered by the +5 VDC that powers the MBus module. By checking the state of the LEDs on the power supplies and the alphanumeric displays on the RP and line cards, you can determine when and where the system failed in the startup sequence. When you start up the system by turning on the power supply power switches, the following should occur: • The power supply green input OK (DC-input power supply) or AC OK (AC-input power supply) LED should go on immediately; it should remain on as long as the system is receiving source power and the power switch is in the ON (|) position. If this LED does not go on, or if it goes off while the power switch is still on, there could be a problem with either the source power, the internal DC voltages (+5 VDC and –48 VDC) that the power supplies distribute to the internal components, or the cooling subsystem. The green input OK LED indicates the status of the power supplies and internal DC voltages. This LED stays on when all of the following conditions are met: — Power supplies are on and receiving 180 to 264 VAC, 50 to 60 Hz (or –48 VDC to –60 VDC) source power. — Power supplies are providing the +5 and –48 VDC to internal components. — All internal DC voltages are within tolerance. If the AC (or DC) source power or any of the internal DC voltages exceed allowable tolerances, the output OK LED will not go on, or will go off shortly after you turn on the power. Because both the RP (which use +5 and +3.3 VDC), and the blower modules (which uses –48 VDC) are required for operation, a problem with any of the internal DC lines can prevent the system from starting up or continuing operation. Troubleshooting the Installation 5-5 Troubleshooting Overview For example, if there is a problem with the –48 VDC line that supplies the blower module, the system will start up, but will also recognize that the blower is not operating. The system will initiate a blower failure shutdown sequence, display the appropriate warning messages, then shut down after two minutes. If there is a problem with any of the other DC lines, the RP will not be able to initialize the system software, so the system might attempt to start up and fail during the boot sequence. Depending on when the red output OK LED goes off, proceed as follows: — If the input OK LED (or AC OK LED on an AC-input power supply) stays off (if it never goes on) when you turn on the power switch, there is a problem with either the DC (or AC) source power or the DC power that is distributed to the internal components. Proceed to the section “Troubleshooting the Power Subsystem.” — If the input OK LED (or AC OK LED on an AC-input power supply) goes on temporarily, then goes off within 30 seconds, the system is most likely shutting itself down because it detected an out-of-tolerance power or temperature condition within the power supplies. Proceed to the section “Troubleshooting the Power Subsystem.” — If the input OK LED (AC OK LED on an AC-input power supply) goes on, and the system starts up as expected but then displays the following message and shuts down after two minutes, there is a problem with one of the blower modules. Proceed to the section “Troubleshooting the Cooling Subsystem.” %ENVM-2-FAN: Fan has failed, shutdown in 2 minutes — If the red output fail LED (common to both AC-input and DC-input power supplies) stays off, yet the system starts up correctly, displays the preceding message, and then shuts down after about two minutes, there is a problem with the –48 VDC line to the blower module. Proceed to the section “Troubleshooting the Power Subsystem.” 5-6 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Troubleshooting the Power Subsystem • When the system is powered on, the blower modules immediately begin operating. The green fan OK LED should be lit on both blower modules. — If the input OK LED is on, but a blower module is not operating, there is a problem with the blower. (The system will shut itself down if it detects that one or both of the blower modules is not functioning properly.) Proceed to the section “Troubleshooting the Cooling Subsystem.” — If the input OK LED is on at startup and a blower is operating, but the system shuts down after two minutes, there might be a problem with the blower control board. Proceed to the section “Troubleshooting the Cooling Subsystem.” • When the system is powered on, the alphanumeric LED displays on the RP indicate the following: — The top display indicates which RP software component is running. — The bottom display indicates the phase of the boot process that is currently occurring. Troubleshooting the Power Subsystem The power subsystem in the Cisco 12012 consists of the AC-input or DC-input power supplies, the MBus modules, the DC-DC converters, and the power distribution system. The power supplies provide +5 and –48 VDC output. The +5 VDC output from the power supply powers the MBus modules on each card in the system. The MBus modules, in turn, control the DC-DC converters also present on each card in the system. The DC-DC converter takes –48 VDC from the power supply and converts it into +5 and +3.3 VDC, which is distributed to the card circuitry. Begin checking the power subsystem by first looking at the two LEDs on the power supply faceplate. The input OK LED on a DC-input power supply, or the AC OK LED on an AC-input power supply goes on when the power supply power switch is turned on (|) and the power supply is receiving source AC or DC power. The red output fail LED is normally off, but goes on if the power supply detects a fault. In systems with a single DC-input power supply, and in systems with redundant power when both power supplies are being shut down, the output fail LED lights momentarily as the system ramps down, but is off when the power supply has completely shut down. Troubleshooting the Installation 5-7 Troubleshooting the Power Subsystem The AC-input and DC-input power supplies are monitored by the MBus module and the RP for internal temperature conditions and for overvoltage and overcurrent conditions. Continue by checking the following to help isolate the problem with the power subsystem: • Are the power supply input OK LEDs on? — If yes, the power source is good, and the power supplies are functional. — If no, but the blower modules are operating and the alphanumeric LED displays on the RP and line cards are on, suspect a faulty power supply LED. The MBus modules driving the alphanumeric displays are powered by +5 VDC directly from the power supply, and the blower modules use –48 VDC; therefore, if both the RP and the blower modules are operating, all internal DC voltages are within tolerance. Use the show environment command to check the voltages on each card. — If no and there is not other obvious activity, first suspect that the power supply power switch is not fully in the ON (|) position. Rotate the power supply power switch clockwise and ensure that it is set completely in the ON (|) position. — If the power supply power switch is set correctly and the input OK LED remains off, suspect the AC (or DC) source or the power cable. Turn the power supply power switch OFF (STANDBY on an AC-input power supply), and check the source AC (or DC) circuit breaker. Verify that the breaker is on and has not tripped. Verify that the source AC (or DC) circuit breaker has the proper current rating. Each power supply in the Cisco 12012 should be attached to a separate power source. In the case of systems powered by source AC, there might be an uninterruptable power supply (UPS) for each AC-input power supply in the system. Check that the UPS is functioning correctly. Check the power cable or power cord from the power source to the Cisco 12012. Verify that it is in good shape and is not damaged. If the insulation appears cracked or broken, or the plugs appear loose, do not use the cable. Immediately replace it with a new cord or cable. 5-8 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Troubleshooting the Processor Subsystem — If the LED fails to go on after you connect the power supply to a new power source, exchange the power cable with a replacement, if one is available, and turn the power switch back on. If the AC (or input) OK LED then goes on, return the first power cable for replacement. — If the LED still fails to go on when connected to a different power source with a new power cable, the power supply is probably faulty. If a spare power supply is available, replace the existing power supply with the spare and restart the system. If the Input OK LED then goes on, return the faulty power supply for replacement. If you are unable to resolve the problem or if you determine that either the power supply or power cable is faulty, contact a service representative for assistance. Troubleshooting the Processor Subsystem The Cisco 12012 processor subsystem consists of the RP, the line cards, and the alarm card. The RP and the line cards each have two processors: one processor is the card’s main processor; and the other processor is a component in the MBus module. The MBus module begins operation as soon as power is applied to the system. The MBus module determines the type of card it is mounted on and whether it should turn on the DC-DC converter. The RP MBus module turns on card power after a brief delay; the line card MBus modules delay turning on power until they receive a command from the RP. A Cisco 12012 requires one RP be installed. The system cannot operate unless the RP is installed properly; however, the system can operate without any line cards installed as long as none are in partial contact with the backplane pins. A line card that is partially connected to the backplane will send incomplete signals to the RP, which could cause the system to hang. Therefore, first ensure that the RP is installed properly and the system software has initialized successfully. Then, if necessary, you can troubleshoot individual line cards. A power-on self-test (POST) runs immediately at power-on to determine the condition of the RP memory. Results are displayed in the alphanumeric LED display as a pass/fail message. Troubleshooting the Installation 5-9 Troubleshooting the Processor Subsystem Troubleshooting the RP Check the following to help isolate a problem with the RP: • Are both the alphanumeric LED displays on? — The two displays are powered separately. The top display receives power from the DC-DC converter on the RP. The bottom display is powered directly from the power supply; therefore, even if the RP has not powered up, its bottom display could be on. If both displays are off, the RP may not be fully plugged into the backplane connector, there might be a problem with the MBus module on the RP, or the system power supply might be off. — If both displays are on, check the message being displayed. As soon as the DC-DC converter is turned on by the MBus module, the processor on the RP begins the boot process. Status messages are displayed as the boot process continues. (See Table 5-1, which provides a list of messages that can be displayed by the RP alphanumeric LED display.) If one of the messages appears frozen, the boot process could be halted. Note the message being displayed on a piece of paper. Turn off the system power supply power switches, then turn them back on to reset the system and start the boot process again. If the system halts again, the RP could be faulty and might need to be replaced. Table 5-1 LED Display1 RP Alphanumeric LED Display Messages Indications2 LMEM TEST Low memory test running LCAH INIT Lower 15k cache initialization BSS INIT NVRAM INIT EXPT INIT Initialize main memory for ROM Initialize NVRAM Initialize interrupt handlers 5-10 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Troubleshooting the Processor Subsystem Table 5-1 LED Display1 TLB INIT RP Alphanumeric LED Display Messages (Continued) Indications2 Initialize TLB CACH INIT Initialize CPU data and instruction cache CACH PARY Enable CPU cache parity MEM INIT Initialize main memory NVRAM SIZE Size of the NVRAM PCMC INIT Initialize the PCMCIA EXIT INIT Exit the initialization sequence IOS UP MSTR RP The Cisco IOS software is up and running The RP is enabled and recognized by the system 1. The messages shown do not indicate a specific sequence. 2. Some messages appear briefly (millisecond duration); others last several seconds. — If the power supplies and blowers appear operational but none of the RP LEDs or displays are on, suspect that the RP has not been properly installed or that the +5 VDC output from the power supplies is faulty. Turn the power supply power switch OFF (STANDBY on an AC-input power supply) on each power supply, loosen the two captive screws on the top and bottom of the RP faceplate, and use the ejector levers to eject and reseat the RP. Tighten the captive screws, then power up the system by turning the power supply power switches to ON (|). Troubleshooting the Installation 5-11 Troubleshooting the Processor Subsystem • Is a critical, major, or minor alarm LED on the alarm card on? — If any of the three alarm card LEDs is on, a fault has been detected in the system. Check the console for messages indicating the source of the problem. — There could be a false error indication originating from the RP. You might want to reseat or replace the RP. Caution The RP reset switch resets the RP and the entire system. To prevent system errors and problems, use it only at the direction of a Cisco-certified service representative. Troubleshooting the Line Cards Line cards can be installed in slots 0 through 11 in the upper card cage. As each line card powers up, a power-on self-test (POST) is performed on the line card memory. A full set of field diagnostics can also be run on a line card from the system console providing a pass/fail message both in the line card alphanumeric LED display and on the system console. (For information on diagnostic testing, refer to the chapter “Running Diagnostics on the Cisco 12012.”) Check the following to help isolate a problem with the line cards: • Are both the alphanumeric LED displays on? — The two displays are powered separately. The top display receives power from the DC-DC converter on the line card. The bottom display is powered directly from the power supply. So, even if the line card has not powered up, the bottom display could be on. If both displays are off, the line card might not be fully plugged into the backplane connector, there might be a problem with the MBus module on the line card, or the system power supply may be off. — If both displays are on, check the message being displayed. As soon as the DC-DC converter is turned on by the MBus module, the processor on the line card begins the boot process. Status messages are displayed in the alphanumeric displays as the boot process continues on the line card. 5-12 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Troubleshooting the Processor Subsystem Table 5-2 provides a list of messages that can be displayed by the line card alphanumeric LED display. Some of these messages are displayed only for a few milliseconds; others can last for several seconds. Table 5-2 LED Display1 Line Card Alphanumeric LED Display Messages Indications2 MEM TEST POST memory test running LROM RUN After POST memory test BSS INIT Initialize main memory for ROM RST SAVE Save reset reason register IO RST Reset the I/O system on the card EXPT INIT Initialize interrupt handlers TLB INIT Initialize TLB CACH INIT Initialize CPU data and instruction cache MEM INIT Initialize main memory LROM RDY Ready to access download ROMI GET Getting ROM images FABL WAIT Wait for load of fabric downloader FABL DNLD The fabric downloader loads Troubleshooting the Installation 5-13 Troubleshooting the Processor Subsystem Table 5-2 LED Display1 Line Card Alphanumeric LED Display Messages (Continued) Indications2 FABL STRT The fabric downloader launches FABL RUN The fabric downloader launch is complete IOS DNLD The Cisco IOS software downloads IOS STRT The Cisco IOS software launches IOS UP The Cisco IOS software runs in DRAM IOS RUN The line card is enabled and ready for use 1. The messages shown do not indicate a specific sequence. 2. Some messages appear briefly (millisecond duration); others last several seconds. Troubleshooting Using the Alarm Card The alarm card is installed in the rightmost slot in the upper card cage. The slot is labeled Alarm card and is slightly narrower than the rest of the slots in the upper card cage. In addition, the alarm card slot backplane connector is different from the rest of the backplane connectors in the upper card cage. The alarm card has three primary functions: • Provides a visual display of the three stages of system alarm (critical, major, and minor) detected by the system’s environmental monitor. Three pairs of LEDs (two pair of LEDs are red, one pair of LEDs is amber) on the alarm card faceplate are driven by the environmental monitor software in the system. When the environmental software detects an abnormal condition (such as overtemperature or overvoltage), the software determines the severity of the condition and sets the appropriate pair of alarm card LEDs. The alarm card LEDs are paired for redundancy. 5-14 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Troubleshooting the Cooling Subsystem • Provides a connection point for the system to connect to two site-wide external audio/visual alarm systems. Two redundant 25-pin D-sub connectors on the alarm card faceplate are tied directly to the critical, major, and minor alarm relays on the alarm card. (Only safety extra-low voltage [SELV] external alarm circuits can be attached to the two external alarm connectors.) A switch on the alarm card faceplate can reset an audio alarm that signals that a critical, major, or minor error has occurred. The visual alarm must be reset by the environmental monitor software. • Provides a visual status of the cards in the lower card cage through five pairs of LEDs (one pair for each slot in the lower card cage). A green enabled LED indicates the card in the slot has been detected by the system and is OK. A yellow fail LED indicates a fault in the card in that lower card cage slot has been detected by the system. Note Check the alarm card for critical, major, or minor error LEDs that are on. If any of the six LEDs are on, check the system console for messages describing the fault. Troubleshooting the Cooling Subsystem The Cisco 12012 has two blower modules that provide cooling air for the other system components. The top blower module is mounted in the frame above the upper card cage. The bottom blower module is mounted in the frame below the power supply bay. Each blower module receives power and signals though harnesses attached to the frame. A connector recessed in the back of the blower module mates with a connector mounted on the frame when the blower module is installed in the frame. Troubleshooting the Installation 5-15 Troubleshooting the Cooling Subsystem Both blower modules are needed to provide sufficient cooling air through the system. Each blower module contains three variable speed fans and a controller card. There are two LEDs on the blower module faceplate visible through the blower module front cover. The green LED, when lit, indicates that the blower module is functioning. Check the following to help isolate a problem with the cooling system: • When you start up the system, do the blower modules go on? Note To determine if a blower module is operating, visually check the two LEDs. Under normal operation the green fans OK LED should be on. Listen for the blower fans. In noisy environments, place your hand at the back of the frame, behind the blower modules, both top and bottom, to feel for air being forced out the exhaust vents. — If the blower modules come on, the –48 VDC line from the power supply to the blower is good. — If one or both of the blower modules do not come on, there could a problem with either the blower module or the –48 VDC power. If both blower modules do not come on, it is likely there is problem with the –48 VDC output from the power supply. Check the red output fail LED on each power supply. If the output fail LED on a power supply is on, the power supply is faulty and should be replaced. — If one or both of the blower modules do not come on and the power supply output fail LED is off (–48 VDC is OK), ensure that the blower module is seated properly in the frame. Remove the blower module snap-on front cover, loosen the two captive screws on the blower module faceplate, grasp the blower module handle and pull the blower module out and then firmly push to reseat the blower module in the frame. Reinstall the blower module front cover. — If the blower module does not come on, there could be a problem with the blower module controller card. The controller card controls the speed of each fan. Fan speed is dependent on the air temperature detected on the cards in the upper and lower card cages and the power supplies in the power supply bay. Changes in air temperature in one of those locations changes the fan speed which forces less or more cooling air through both card cages and the power supply bay. 5-16 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Additional Reference Information for Troubleshooting • The following message indicates that the system has detected an overtemperature condition or out-of-tolerance power inside the system: Queued messages: %ENVM-1-SHUTDOWN: Environmental Monitor initiated shutdown If an environmental shutdown results from an out-of-tolerance power condition, the output fail LED on the power supply will go on before the system shuts down. Refer to the section “Troubleshooting the Power Subsystem.” — Although an overtemperature condition is unlikely at initial startup, ensure that heated exhaust air from other equipment is not entering the air filter, and that there is sufficient clearance (at least 12-inches, 30.5 cm) around the front and rear of the chassis to allow cooling air to enter and hot air to exhaust. — Check the condition of the air filter located in a hinged tray in front of the lower card cage. If the air filter appears dirty, you should remove the filter and either vacuum it or replace it. — The preceding message could also indicate a faulty component or temperature sensor. Before the system shuts down, use the show environment all or show environment table commands to display the internal system environment including voltages and temperatures measured at each card. There are no field replaceable components in the blower module. If the blower module is faulty, you must replace the entire blower module. If you are still unable to resolve the problem, contact a service representative for assistance. Additional Reference Information for Troubleshooting This section provides a list of additional Cisco reference material for troubleshooting your Cisco 12012 installation: • • • • • The configuration notes that shipped with your individual line cards The chapter “Running Diagnostics on the Cisco 12012” Troubleshooting Internetworking Systems Debug Command Reference System Error Messages Troubleshooting the Installation 5-17 Additional Reference Information for Troubleshooting 5-18 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide CHAPTER 6 Running Diagnostics on the Cisco 12012 Field diagnostics are available for the Cisco 12012 GSR to help you isolate faulty hardware to the level of a field-replaceable unit (FRU) without disrupting the operation of the system. After you identify the faulty unit, you can replace it with a spare unit. Field diagnostics are not designed to identify specific components within the router. They simply determine whether a particular card is operational or defective. Running Diagnostics on the Cisco 12012 GSR is presented in the following sections: • • • • Diagnostic Test Overview on page 1 Using the diag Command on page 3 Diagnostic Testing Sequence on page 4 Loading and Running Diagnostics on page 4 Diagnostic Test Overview There are more than a hundred diagnostic tests for line cards, including the following: • • • • Processor tests Memory tests Component tests Major data path tests The field diagnostics software image is bundled with the Cisco IOS software and is downloaded from the route processor (RP) to the target card before testing. Running Diagnostics on the Cisco 12012 6-1 Diagnostic Test Overview Note When using Cisco IOS Release 12.0(21)S or 12.0(21)ST, or a later release of 12.0S or 12.0ST, the default download method changes from the mbus to the switch fabric. It takes about 1-minute to obtain test results from the switch fabric compared to 15-minutes to obtain test results from the mbus. While diagnostics are running, the line card being tested is controlled by the diagnostic software. Diagnostics take the line card under test offline. The diagnostics affect just the line card being tested; the rest of the line cards remain online and continue to pass traffic normally. Except for the tests on the clock and scheduler cards (CSCs) and the switch fabric cards (SFCs), which may temporarily drop throughput on those cards, the diagnostics do not affect system performance. Diagnostic testing stops at the completion of all of the tests, when terminated by the user, or by default when an error is encountered. If multiple cards are specified for the test cycle, the diagnostics stop testing a card when it fails a test, but continue testing the remaining cards. Note You can use the diag slot coe command to force the continuation of tests, even after an error is encountered. This is not recommended for use on operational, business-critical routers. When testing is finished, a pass or fail message displays on the console, as well as on the alphanumeric LED display on the card being tested. 6-2 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Using the diag Command Using the diag Command The diagnostic test command, issued at the privileged EXEC mode prompt on the system console, takes the following form: diag slot [halt] [previous] [mbus] [verbose] [wait] [coe] where: slot Specifies which card cage slot to test. The diagnostic software determines the type of card in the slot and downloads the appropriate tests. halt (Optional) Stops the active diagnostic test. previous (Optional) Allows you to examine the last test results on the card, stored in EEPROM, specified by the slot parameter. mbus1 (Optional) Forces the route processor to load diags from the mbus. verbose (Optional) Turns on the status messaging capability of the diagnostics. The default is minimum messaging. wait (Optional) Stops the diagnostics from reloading the Cisco IOS image following the completion of diagnostic testing. The card must be ejected from the slot, reinstalled in the slot, and reconfigured manually. coe2 (Continue on error) (Optional) Continues testing even after a failed test. 1. Using this option results in a 15-minute delay before test results are returned. This command option is available when using Cisco IOS Release 12.0(21)S or 12.0(21)ST, or a later release of 12.0S or 12.0ST. 2. Not recommended for use on operational, business-critical routers. This command option is available when using Cisco IOS Release 12.0(21)S or 12.0(21)ST, or a later release of 12.0S or 12.0ST. To stop diagnostic testing at any time, enter the halt option in the command, at the privileged EXEC mode prompt on the system console: diag slot halt Running Diagnostics on the Cisco 12012 6-3 Diagnostic Testing Sequence Diagnostic Testing Sequence When testing a card, the diagnostics perform the following operations in this sequence: 1 Halts the normal operation of the card. The card is no longer available for network traffic. 2 Downloads a diagnostic image from the RPs running IOS software to the line card before testing. The Cisco IOS software image is removed from the line card DRAM and is replaced with the diagnostic software image for the duration of the tests. 3 Sends and receives messages across the MBus to and from the card being tested. During the testing process, messages are passed from the line card under test to the RP. If the verbose option is turned on, interim messages listing the start and completion of each test are displayed at the console. If the verbose option is not specified (default), the console displays the minimum number of messages. 4 Displays pass or fail test results. At the conclusion of the diagnostic tests, a pass or fail message is sent to the RP, which passes the message to the console and to the alphanumeric LED display on the line card being tested. The message is displayed on the alphanumeric display until the Cisco IOS image is booted following the completion of testing. The pass or fail message is also stored in Flash memory for later factory analysis. 5 Reloads the Cisco IOS software image. If diagnostic testing was successful, and you do not specify the wait option, the Cisco IOS software image is loaded from the RP to the card under test, bringing it back online. Loading and Running Diagnostics Procedures for loading and running diagnostic tests on a card in the router, including sample console display messages, follow. You must run diagnostic tests from the system console in privileged EXEC mode. 6-4 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Loading and Running Diagnostics To load and run diagnostics on a card, follow these steps: Step 1 From the EXEC prompt (Router>), enter enable to enter privileged EXEC mode: Router> enable Password: Step 2 Enter the password assigned to the system. The prompt changes to the privileged EXEC prompt: Router# Step 3 Determine the slot number of the card on which you want to run diagnostics. Note Although you can run diagnostics concurrently on up to three line cards, the recommended number is only one at a time. The cards will be taken offline and cannot pass traffic. Step 4 Enter the diag command: Router# diag slot The diagnostic tests are downloaded and run. Test status and administrative messages are returned to the system console. At the end of testing, a pass or fail message is displayed on the console. The number of messages displayed depends on whether you included the verbose option in the command. Note Field diagnostics run limited tests of the switch fabric when testing a line card. This provides a good method of troubleshooting switch fabric problems. Running Diagnostics on the Cisco 12012 6-5 Loading and Running Diagnostics Diagnostic Examples Several examples of diagnostic tests are given in the following sections: • • • Without verbose Option on page 6 With verbose Option on page 7 Failed Diagnostic on page 9 Without verbose Option To see how the verbose option changes the messages from the diagnostics to the console, refer to the following examples. In the first example, diagnostics are run on a line card installed in slot 2 in the card cage. The diagnostics are run without the verbose option set (minimum messaging). The console displays a message sequence similar to the following, showing the progress of the diagnostic testing. In the following example message sequence, inserted comments describe the type of diagnostic activity by the messages. Router# diag 2 Running DIAG config check Running Diags will halt ALL activity on the requested slot. [confirm] Router# Launching a Field Diagnostic for slot 2 Downloading diagnostic tests to slot 2 (timeout set to 400 sec.) Field Diag download COMPLETE for slot 2 FD 2> **************************************************** FD 2> GSR Field Diagnostics V3.0 FD 2> Compiled by award on Tue Aug 3 15:58:13 PDT 2000 FD 2> view: award-bfr_112.FieldDiagRelease FD 2> **************************************************** FD 2> BFR_CARD_TYPE_OC48_1P_POS_TTM testing... FD 2> running in slot 2 (73 tests) Executing all diagnostic tests in slot 2 6-6 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Loading and Running Diagnostics The messages in the lines shown above indicate that the diagnostics software checked the card type and status, determined that the card installed in slot 2 could run diagnostics, downloaded the diagnostic software image to the card, and gave it the command to run all diagnostic tests. (total/indiv. timeout set to 600/220 sec.) The message in the line shown above indicates the two timeout values set for diagnostics. The first timeout is set to 600 seconds, which is the maximum amount of time allowed for all diagnostic tests to run. The second timeout is set to 220 seconds, which is the maximum amount of time allowed for any one diagnostic test to run. Field Diagnostic ****PASSED**** for slot 2 The message in the line shown above indicates that the diagnostic tests run on the card in slot 2 all passed. Shutting down diags in slot 2 Board will reload SLOT 2:%SYS-5-RESTART: System restarted -Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software IOS (tm) GS Software (GSR-P-MZ), Released Version 12.0(n)GS Copyright (c) 1986-2000 by cisco Systems, Inc. Compiled Fri 17-Sep-00 17:58 by ... Router# The messages in the lines shown above indicate that the diagnostics software is automatically terminated and the line card is reloaded and restarted. With verbose Option If you set the verbose option, that changes the diagnostics message stream to the console. As an example, running diagnostics on the line card in slot 2 with the verbose option set produces a message stream to the console similar to the following (only a partial list of messages is shown). In the following example message sequence, inserted comments describe the type of diagnostic activity indicated by the messages. Running Diagnostics on the Cisco 12012 6-7 Loading and Running Diagnostics Note In Cisco IOS Release 12.0(21)S or 12.0(21)ST, or a later release of 12.0S or 12.0ST, this option displays the name of the test as testing progresses, and it displays “fatalError” when a failure is detected. Router# diag 2 verbose Running DIAG config check Running Diags will halt ALL activity on the requested slot. [confirm] Router# Launching a Field Diagnostic for slot 2 Downloading diagnostic tests to slot 2 (timeout set to 400 sec.) Field Diag download COMPLETE for slot 2 FD 2> **************************************************** FD 2> GSR Field Diagnostics V3.0 FD 2> Compiled by award on Tue Aug 3 15:58:13 PDT 2000 FD 2> view: award-bfr_112.FieldDiagRelease FD 2> **************************************************** FD 2> BFR_CARD_TYPE_OC48_1P_POS_TTM testing... FD 2> running in slot 2 (73 tests) Executing all diagnostic tests in slot 2 (total/indiv. timeout set to 600/220 sec.) FD 2> Verbosity now (0x00000001) TESTSDISP Field diagnostics, verbose example (continued) FDIAG_STAT_IN_PROGRESS: FDIAG_STAT_IN_PROGRESS: FDIAG_STAT_IN_PROGRESS: FDIAG_STAT_IN_PROGRESS: FDIAG_STAT_IN_PROGRESS: FDIAG_STAT_IN_PROGRESS: . . . FDIAG_STAT_IN_PROGRESS: FDIAG_STAT_DONE test test test test test test #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 R5K Internal Cache Burst Operations Subblock Ordering Dram Marching Pattern Dram Datapins Dram Busfloat test #73 SDRAM Traffic Field Diagnostic ****PASSED**** for slot 2 6-8 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Loading and Running Diagnostics Field Diag eeprom values: run 0 fail mode 0 (PASS) slot 2 last test failed was 0, error code 0 Shutting down diags in slot 2 Board will reload SLOT 2:%SYS-5-RESTART: System restarted -Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software IOS (tm) GS Software (GSR-P-MZ), Released Version 12.0(n)GS Copyright (c) 1986-2000 by cisco Systems, Inc. Compiled Fri 17-Sep-00 17:58 by ... Router# When you set the verbose option, most of the information returned by the diagnostic tests is status messages that indicate when tests start and when they are completed. At the end of the diagnostic tests, a message indicates whether the card passed or failed the tests. Failed Diagnostic If a diagnostic test fails on a line card, testing halts with that test. The line card will not reload or come back online automatically. The following example shows a diagnostic message stream to the console for a line card located in slot 7. In the example, the card fails one of the diagnostic tests, stopping the diagnostic cycle on that test. Router# diag 7 verbose Running DIAG config check Running Diags will halt ALL activity on the requested slot. [confirm] Router# Launching a Field Diagnostic for slot 7 Downloading diagnostic tests to slot 7 (timeout set to 400 sec.) Field Diag download COMPLETE for slot 7 FD 7> **************************************************** FD 7> GSR Field Diagnostics V3.0 FD 7> Compiled by award on Tue Aug 3 15:58:13 PDT 2000 FD 7> view: award-bfr_112.FieldDiagRelease FD 7> **************************************************** FD 7> BFR_CARD_TYPE_OC48_1P_POS testing... FD 7> running in slot 7 (128 tests) Executing all diagnostic tests in slot 7 (total/indiv. timeout set to 600/220 sec.) FD 7> Verbosity now (0x00000001) TESTSDISP Running Diagnostics on the Cisco 12012 6-9 Loading and Running Diagnostics FDIAG_STAT_IN_PROGRESS: test #1 R5K Internal Cache FDIAG_STAT_IN_PROGRESS: test #2 Burst Operations FDIAG_STAT_IN_PROGRESS: test #3 Subblock Ordering . . . FDIAG_STAT_IN_PROGRESS: test #21, error_code 5 Field Diagnostic: ****TEST FAILURE**** slot 7: last test run 21, To Fabric SOP FIFO SRAM Memory, error 5 Field Diag eeprom values:run 0 fail mode 1 (TEST FAILURE) slot 7 last test failed was 21, error code 5 Shutting down diags in slot 7 slot 7 done, will not reload automatically Router# Note The DRAM is the only field-replaceable component on a line card; therefore, if a diagnostic test fails, you must replace the line card, which is the field-replaceable unit (FRU). 6-10 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide CHAPTER 7 Maintaining the Cisco 12012 After you install and configure your Cisco 12012, you might need to perform specific maintenance procedures and operations to ensure that the router continues to operate properly, to upgrade specific system components or replace field replaceable units (FRUs). This chapter describes procedures and maintenance operations required to maintain your Cisco 12012. (Where appropriate, you are referred to specific procedures in the chapter “Installing a Cisco 12012.”) Your Cisco 12012 is configured to your order and is ready for installation and startup when it leaves the factory. In the future, as your networking requirements change, you might need to upgrade your system, add components, replace components, or change the initial hardware configuration. Following are specific maintenance procedures you might require for your Cisco 12012: • • Cleaning and replacing the air filter assembly Replacing the following components: — AC-input power supply — DC-input power supply — Blower module — Card cage assembly Maintaining the Cisco 12012 7-1 Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filter Assembly — Route Processor (RP) — Alarm card — Clock and scheduler card and switch fabric card • Upgrading CPU memory on the RP Note Line card specific information is included in the individual configuration notes that ship with the line cards. To prevent problems, before performing any procedures in this chapter, review the section “Safety Recommendations” in the chapter “Preparing for Installation.” Review the safety warnings listed in the document Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for the Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router (Document Number 78-4347-xx) that accompanied your Cisco 12012 before you reconfigure or perform maintenance procedures for your router. Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filter Assembly The Cisco 12012 has a serviceable air filter assembly mounted in a hinged tray on the front of the lower card cage. The air filter removes dust from the room air drawn into the Cisco 12012 by the two blower modules. There are two components to the air filter assembly: • • Air filter Air filter tray The air filter should be inspected for any rips or tears during the initial installation and then checked one time per year thereafter. If the air filter appears dirty during these inspections, you can vacuum it. For instructions on cleaning the air filter, see “Cleaning the Air Filter” on page 7. 7-2 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filter Assembly Note The air filter has a normal life of 10 years when the chassis is installed in a clean-room environment. You need the following tools to complete the air filter maintenance procedure: • • • • • • 3/16-inch Phillips screwdriver M3 Phillips, pan head screws ESD-preventive wrist strap Vacuum cleaner Replacement air filter (Product Number GSR12-FLTR-ENH=) Air filter assembly (Product Number GSR12-FLT-UPG=) Note You can perform this procedure while the Cisco 12012 remains powered up. Removing the Air Filter Perform the following steps to remove the air filter: Step 1 Attach an ESD-preventive wrist strap to yourself and to one of the two ESD connection sockets located on the front edges of the card cage or to bare metal on the card cage frame. (See Figure 7-1.) Maintaining the Cisco 12012 7-3 CLEAN CONNECTOR ESD connection socket CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT PRODUCTO LASER DE CLASSE 1 PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1 LASERPRODUKT DER KLASSE 1 T EC EJ 0 0 X AU T SE RE A TX INNER RX OUTER -1 OT SL -0 OT SL O/LT AC VE IE TI R AC CAR R ALARM 1 LINK TX LL CO RX MII ALARM 2 5 -4 RJ 0 1 C CS 0 1 ALARM 2 C SF 7-4 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide IL FA D LE AB EN OC-12/STM-4 POS OC-12/STM-4 ATM 2CHOC-12/DS3-IR-SC GIGABIT ROUTE PROCESSOR Do not place any tools on the air filter tray or within the lower card cage. Damaging the honeycomb screen on the air filter tray or with the lower card cage could restrict the airflow causing an overtemperature condition in the router. Caution AL OR OR IC IT MAJ MIN CR R L VE IE EL TI R C AC CAR RX OLE NS CO B TX INNER RX OUTER R L VE IE EL TI R C AC CAR RX R VE IE T TI R PK AC CAR RX 46596 Connecting an ESD-Preventive Strap to the Cisco 12012 Figure 7-1 WITH ALCOHOL WIPES BEFORE CONNECTING OOOO O O O OOO OOO OO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOO OOOOOOO OOOOOO OOOOOO OOOOO OOOOO O O O O OOOOO O O O O OOOO O O OO O O OO Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filter Assembly Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filter Assembly Step 2 Use the 3/16-inch flat-blade screwdriver to loosen the two captive screws on the air filter tray. Step 3 Pivot the air filter tray down, away from the card cage. Warning There might be exposed line or fabric cards. Extreme caution is advised when working around an open card cage. Step 4 Grasp the old air filter with your fingers and gently pull it out of the air filter tray. (See Figure 7-2.) Note An indentation on each side of the old air filter tray holds the old air filter inside the tray. Maintaining the Cisco 12012 7-5 Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filter Assembly Figure 7-2 Removing the Air Filter IL FA D LE AB EN 0 OC-12/STM-4 POS 1 C CS 0 1 2 ALARM SFC Q OC-3/STM-POS OC-12/STM-4 ATM GIGABIT ROUTE PROCESSOR Air filter Captive screw INPUT: 200 -240V 10 A 50/60 HZ 2000 W AC OK ~ INPUT: 200 -240V 10 A 50/60 HZ 2000 W AC OK ~ INPUT: 200 -240V 10 A ~ AC OK OUTPUT FAIL Step 5 INPUT: 200 -240V 10 A 50/60 HZ 2000 W 50/60 HZ 2000 W AC OK ~ 46034 Air filter tray OUTPUT FAIL Visually check the condition of the air filter. • If the air filter appears dirty, you can vacuum it. For instructions on cleaning the air filter, see “Cleaning the Air Filter” on page 7. • If the filter appears worn or is torn, you must replace it. For instructions on replacing the air filter assembly, see “Replacing the Air Filter Assembly” on page 7. 7-6 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filter Assembly Cleaning the Air Filter Perform the following steps clean the air filter with a vacuum cleaner: Step 1 Move the air filter away from the lower card cage opening. Step 2 Vacuum the surface of the filter thoroughly. Do not vacuum the filter while it is installed or near the lower card cage opening; doing so can dislodge substantial amounts of dust, which could be drawn into the card cage assembly. Never wash a filter and install it in the system. Moisture drawn into the system can damage the components. Caution Replacing the Air Filter Assembly The following sections describe how to remove and install a replacement air filter assembly. The air filter assembly includes a new air filter and air filter tray. • • Removing the Old Air Filter Assembly Installing A New Air Filter Assembly Removing the Old Air Filter Assembly The following procedure guides you through the removal of the old air filter assembly. Caution To prevent damage, do not place any tools on the air filter tray or inside the card cage. Laying tools inside either the card cage or on the air filter tray could restrict the air flow and cause an overtemperature condition in the Cisco 12012. Warning There might be exposed line or fabric cards. Extreme caution is advised when working around an open card cage. Step 1 Set the old air filter aside. Maintaining the Cisco 12012 7-7 Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filter Assembly Step 2 Close the air filter tray and use only finger pressure to tighten the two captive screws to the chassis. Step 3 Use the Number 1 Phillips screwdriver to remove the five screws used to attach the bottom hinge of the old air filter tray to the chassis. (See Figure 7-3.) Note Save the five screws when removing the old air filter tray. They will be used to secure the new air filter tray to the chassis. Step 4 Figure 7-3 Put the screws in a safe place away from the card cage. Removing the Screws from the Old Air Filter Tray /STM-4 POS STM-POS STM-4 ATM Captive screws (2) Filter housing Hinge screws (5) INPUT: 200 - 240V 10 A 50/60 HZ 2000 W AC OK INPUT: 200 - 240V 10 A ~ INPUT: 200 - 240V 10 A 50/60 HZ 2000 W 50/60 HZ 2000 W AC OK OUTPUT FAIL AC OK OUTPUT FAIL ~ INPUT: 200 - 240V 10 A 50/60 HZ 2000 W ~ AC OK OUTPUT FAIL 46032 OUTPUT FAIL ~ 7-8 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filter Assembly Step 5 Loosen the two captive screws at the top of the old air filter tray until it is no longer attached to the card cage and chassis. Keep these screws for use later. Note Hold the old air filter tray firmly with one hand because it will be completely disconnected from the chassis. Step 6 Move the old air filter tray away from the front of the card cage and chassis so that any dislodged dust will not be drawn into the card cage. Installing A New Air Filter Assembly This procedure guides you through installing a new air filter assembly for the Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router. The new air filter tray is open on all sides and the bottom to increase the cooling capacity of the Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router. Step 1 While holding the new air filter tray firmly with one hand, ensure that the five holes in the hinge, located at the bottom of the new air filter tray, align with the holes in the chassis. Step 2 Use finger pressure only to tighten the two captive screws at the top of the new air filter tray. (See Figure 7-4.) Maintaining the Cisco 12012 7-9 Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filter Assembly Figure 7-4 New Air Filter Hinge Holes and Chassis Holes Alignment /STM-4 POS STM-POS STM-4 ATM Captive screws (2) Filter housing Hinge screws (5) INPUT: 200 - 240V 10 A 50/60 HZ 2000 W AC OK INPUT: 200 - 240V 10 A 50/60 HZ 2000 W AC OK OUTPUT FAIL ~ INPUT: 200 - 240V 10 A ~ INPUT: 200 - 240V 10 A 50/60 HZ 2000 W AC OK OUTPUT FAIL ~ 50/60 HZ 2000 W AC OK OUTPUT FAIL 46032 OUTPUT FAIL ~ Step 3 Use the Number 1 Phillips screwdriver and all five of the screws you saved earlier to fasten the bottom hinge of the new air filter tray to the chassis. Step 4 After tightening all five screws, give each screw an additional one quarter turn to ensure a tight seal between the new air filter tray and the chassis. Step 5 Verify that the two captive screws at the top of the air filter tray are loosened. (See Figure 7-4.) Step 6 Allow the bottom hinge to hold the air filter tray in the full open position. Step 7 Gently slide the new air filter, with the filter fabric facing downward, toward the floor, and the open side of the filter facing upward, into the new air filter tray until it is firmly seated against the bottom of the new air filter tray. (See Figure 7-5.) 7-10 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filter Assembly Figure 7-5 Installing the New Air Filter in the New Air Filter Tray IL FA D LE AB EN 0 OC-12/STM-4 POS 1 C CS 0 1 46031 2 ALARM SFC OC-12/STM-4 ATM Q OC-3/STM-POS GIGABIT ROUTE PROCESSOR Step 8 Raise the new air filter tray until it touches the chassis. Step 9 With one hand apply pressure to the top of the new air filter tray. While holding the pressure, use the 3/16-inch flat-blade screwdriver to tighten the captive screws to ensure a good seal of the new air filter tray against the chassis. Step 10 After tightening both captive screws with the 3/16-inch flat-blade screwdriver, give each screw an additional one quarter turn to ensure a tight seal between the new air filter tray and the chassis. Step 11 Discard the old air filter and the old air filter tray. Maintaining the Cisco 12012 7-11 Removing and Replacing an AC-Input Power Supply Removing and Replacing an AC-Input Power Supply The Cisco 12012 supports up to four AC-input power supplies. While the AC-input power supplies support online insertion and removal, you must observe the following conditions: • If your Cisco 12012 is configured with two AC-input power supplies, you must power off the system before removing and replacing a defective power supply. • If your Cisco 12012 is configured with three or four AC-input power supplies, you can remove and replace one power supply while the system remains powered up. Warning AC operation requires a minimum configuration of two AC-input power supplies. You need the following tools to perform this procedure: • • • 1/4-inch flat-blade screwdriver ESD wrist strap The replacement AC-input power supply (Product Number PWR-GSR12-AC=) and the applicable AC power cord for your site Caution Do not mix AC-input and DC-input power supplies in a Cisco 12012. Removing an AC-Input Power Supply Perform the following steps to remove an AC-input power supply: Step 1 Attach an ESD wrist strap to your wrist and to one of the two ESD connection sockets located on the front edges of the upper card cage or to bare metal on the frame. Step 2 If you have not already done so, turn the power switch to the STANDBY position on the power supply you want to remove. (See Figure 7-6a.) 7-12 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Removing and Replacing an AC-Input Power Supply Note Turning the power supply switch to the STANDBY position also releases a latch that secures the power supply in the power supply bay. Step 3 Disconnect the AC power cord from the source AC receptacle. (See Figure 7-6b.) Step 4 Release the spring clip on the power supply faceplate. (See Figure 7-6c.) Step 5 Disconnect the AC power cord from the power supply AC receptacle. (See Figure 7-6d.) Step 6 Loosen the captive screw on the power supply faceplate. (See Figure 7-6e.) Disconnecting an AC-Input Power Supply b Release spring clip INPUT: 200 - 240V 10 A 50/60 HZ 2000 W ~ c Disconnect power cord d Disconnect power cord from source AC AC OK OUTPUT FAIL a Turn power switch to standby position ( ) H10375 Figure 7-6 e Loosen captive screw Maintaining the Cisco 12012 7-13 Removing and Replacing an AC-Input Power Supply Step 7 Figure 7-7 Grasp the power supply handle and pull straight out to disconnect the power supply from the backplane connector. Slide the power supply halfway out of the bay. (See Figure 7-7.) Removing an AC-Input Power Supply INPUT: 200 -240V 10 A ~ INPUT: 200 -240V 10 A 50/60 HZ 2000 W 50/60 HZ 2000 W ~ AC-input power supply INPUT: 200 -240V 10 A 50/60 HZ 2000 W AC OK OUTPUT FAIL ~ AC OK OUTPUT FAIL AC OK H10376 OUTPUT FAIL Use two hands to slide power supply out of bay 7-14 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Removing and Replacing an AC-Input Power Supply The AC-input power supply weighs 18 lb (8 kg). Use two hands when handling the power supply. Caution Step 8 Place your free hand underneath the power supply for support and slide the power supply completely out of the bay. If you plan to return the old power supply to the factory, repackage it in the shipping container you received with the replacement power supply. Installing a New or Replacement AC-Input Power Supply If you plan to upgrade your system by installing additional power supplies, you can install the power supply without removing power from the system. Note We recommend attaching each AC-input power supply to an independent power source for full redundancy. We also recommend that you use an uninterruptable power source (UPS) to protect against power failures at your site. Each AC-input power supply operating between 200 VAC and 240 VAC requires a dedicated 20A service for North American use, or a 10A or 16A service for international use. The AC-input power supply weighs 18 lb (8 kg). Use two hands when handling the power supply. Caution Perform the following steps to install a new or replacement AC-input power supply: Step 1 Attach an ESD wrist strap to your wrist and to one of the two ESD connection sockets located on the front edges of the upper card cage or to bare metal on the frame. Step 2 Verify that the power switch on the replacement supply is in the STANDBY position. (See Figure 7-6.) Maintaining the Cisco 12012 7-15 Removing and Replacing an AC-Input Power Supply Step 3 If you are upgrading your Cisco 12012 with an additional AC-input power supply, you must remove the power supply blank covering the empty power supply bay before installing the power supply. To remove a power supply blank, complete the following steps: (a) Loosen the captive screw on the power supply blank faceplate. (b) Slide the power supply blank out the front of the power supply bay. (c) Retain the blank for possible future use. To prevent damaging the power supply backplane connector, do not use excessive force when installing a power supply into the bay. Caution Note The power supply bays are designated A1, A2, B1, and B2, from left to right. Install power supplies in the bays in the following order: A1, B1, A2, and B2. Any bay that does not have a power supply installed must have a power supply blank installed to maintain airflow and for EMI considerations. Step 4 Using two hands to support and guide the power supply, slide it into the vacant bay. Push the power supply all the way into the power supply bay until the faceplate makes contact with the front of the bay. Note All electrical connections between the power supply and the backplane are made automatically when the power supply is fully inserted in the power supply bay. Step 5 Tighten the captive screw on the power supply faceplate. Step 6 Connect the AC power cord to the power supply AC receptacle. Clip the spring clip over the power cord plug. Step 7 Connect the other end of the AC power cord to the source AC receptacle. 7-16 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Removing and Replacing an AC-Input Power Supply Step 8 Verify that any empty power supply bays have power supply blanks installed. Step 9 Turn the power switch on each AC-input power supply to ON (|). Note Turning the power supply switch to ON (|) also engages a latch that secures the power supply in the power supply bay. Checking the Replacement of an AC-Input Power Supply To complete the power supply replacement, observe the LEDs on the power supply faceplate to verify that the power supply is operating properly. Then perform the following steps: Step 1 Check the following to make sure they are secure: • Each power supply is inserted all the way into its bay, and the captive screw is tightened. • All power supply cords are attached to the power supply receptacles and secured with spring clips. • At the AC power-source end of the power cord, the cord is securely attached to the AC power connector. • The source AC voltage is within the range indicated on the power supply faceplate. • When two or more supplies are installed, each power cord is connected to a separate AC power source if possible. • All unused power supply bays have power supply blanks installed. Maintaining the Cisco 12012 7-17 Removing and Replacing an AC-Input Power Supply Step 2 Verify that the Cisco 12012 powers up correctly. Visually check that the green AC OK LED on the power supply faceplate is on: This indicates that the source AC voltage is within the range of 180 to 264 VAC. If the AC OK LED is off, check for the following: Step 3 • • Verify that the source AC circuit breaker is on. • Check that the power supply power switch in the ON (|) position. Verify that the AC power cord is firmly connected from the source AC circuit breaker to the power supply. Visually check that the red output fail LED flashes on and off for five seconds, then goes off. • If the output fail LED goes on and stays on, move the power supply to another bay if possible and turn the power switch ON (|). If the LEDs go on properly when the power supply is installed in another bay, suspect a faulty backplane connector in the power supply in which it was originally installed. If the output fail LED goes on and stays on when the power supply is installed in a second bay, suspect a power supply failure or an adverse environmental condition (for example, the power supply has detected an overvoltage or overtemperature condition and has shut down). • If the output fail LED goes on only on one power supply, assume that the power supply or AC source (for that power supply) is faulty. • If the output fail LED goes on and stays on, on multiple power supplies connected to separate AC sources, suspect that an overvoltage or possibly an overtemperature condition has occurred in the power supply bay causing the power supplies to fail. If the power supply fails to operate properly after several attempts to power it up, contact a service representative for assistance. 7-18 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Removing and Replacing a DC-Input Power Supply Removing and Replacing a DC-Input Power Supply The Cisco 12012 supports up to two DC-input power supplies. If one power supply fails in systems configured with two DC-input power supplies, the second supply has sufficient capacity to maintain uninterrupted operation of the router while you replace the defective power supply. You need the following tools to install or replace a DC-input power supply: • • • • • 1/4-inch flat-blade screwdriver ESD wrist strap Voltmeter 10-mm nutdriver The replacement DC-input power supply (Product Number PWR-GSR12-DC=) Caution Do not mix AC-input and DC-input power supplies in a Cisco 12012. Note If you are upgrading your Cisco 12012 with a second DC-input power supply, you will need a source DC power cable and lead terminals to connect source DC power to the DC-input power supply. These parts are not available from Cisco Systems; they are available commercially. (For details on the type of DC power cable to use, refer to the section “Installing a New or Replacement DC-Input Power Supply” in this chapter.) Removing a DC-Input Power Supply Perform the following steps to remove a DC-input power supply: Step 1 Attach an ESD wrist strap to your wrist and to one of the two ESD connection sockets located on the front edges of the upper card cage or to bare metal on the frame. Step 2 If you have not already done so, turn OFF (O) the power switch on the DC-input power supply. Maintaining the Cisco 12012 7-19 Removing and Replacing a DC-Input Power Supply Warning Voltages might be present on the DC-input power supply terminals. Turn off the power source circuit breaker and remove the power supply before accessing the terminals. Note Turning the power supply switch to OFF (O) releases a latch that secures the power supply in the power supply bay. Step 3 Locate and turn off the source DC circuit breaker that services the power supply you want to remove. As an added precaution, tape the circuit breaker handle in the off position. Step 4 Using a flat-blade screwdriver or a 10-mm nutdriver, turn the captive jackscrew counterclockwise (eject) on the power supply faceplate to unseat the power supply from the backplane power connector. Continue turning the jackscrew to disengage the jackscrew from the power supply bay (approximately 12 revolutions). Step 5 Grasp the power supply handle and slide the power supply halfway out of the bay. (See Figure 7-8.) 7-20 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Removing and Replacing a DC-Input Power Supply Figure 7-8 Removing a DC-Input Power Supply H10600 DC-input power supply Use two hands to slide power supply out of bay The DC-input power supply weighs 19 lb (8.3 kg). Use two hands when handling the power supply. Caution Maintaining the Cisco 12012 7-21 Removing and Replacing a DC-Input Power Supply Step 6 Place your free hand underneath the power supply for support and slide the power supply completely out of the bay. Place the power supply face up on the floor in front of you. Step 7 Loosen the two screws that secure the DC-input power supply front cover in place. Lift up slightly, then pull the front cover away from the power supply faceplate. Set the front cover aside. (See Figure 7-9.) Figure 7-9 Removing the DC-Input Power Supply Front Cover Standoff Front cover H10489 DC-input power supply 7-22 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Removing and Replacing a DC-Input Power Supply Step 8 Remove the two screws that secure the power cable bracket to the power supply faceplate and remove the cable bracket. (See Figure 7-10.) Set the bracket and screws aside. Figure 7-10 Removing the Power Cable Bracket Standoff Circuit breaker alarm terminal block H10665 Power cable bracket Bracket screws Source DC power cable Before proceeding to the next step, verify that the source DC circuit breaker servicing the DC power supply you are removing is in the OFF position. Also verify that the power switch on the DC-input power supply is OFF (O). As an additional check, measure the voltages across the leads attached to the power supply you have removed. All readings should be zero volts. Caution Maintaining the Cisco 12012 7-23 Removing and Replacing a DC-Input Power Supply Step 9 Disconnect the source DC power cable leads from the power supply lugs in the following order: negative (–), positive (+), and ground. (See Figure 7-11.) Figure 7-11 Disconnecting the DC-Input Power Supply – + Ground H10702 Circuit breaker alarm terminal block Source DC power cable 7-24 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Removing and Replacing a DC-Input Power Supply Step 10 Pull the DC power cable leads down through the power supply handle and set the power cable aside. Caution As an added precaution, we strongly recommend that you place electrical tape over the exposed metal terminals on the power cable to prevent accidental contact between the leads, or the leads and ground. Step 11 If leads are attached to the power supply circuit breaker external alarm terminal block, record on a piece of paper which terminals the leads are attached to for later reconnection. Step 12 Disconnect the leads attached to the circuit breaker alarm terminal block. (Some sites might not have an external alarm system for the power supply circuit breaker.) If you plan to return the old power supply to the factory, repackage it in the shipping container you received with the replacement power supply. Installing a New or Replacement DC-Input Power Supply This section provides the procedures for replacing a defective DC-input power supply or installing a second DC-input power supply. If you are upgrading your Cisco 12012 with a second DC-input power supply for power supply redundancy, you must meet the following site power and source DC power cable requirements prior to installing the second power supply: • • A dedicated 60-amp service is available for the second power supply. • Three power lugs—Must be dual-hole with 0.625-inch (15.86-mm) centers and able to fit over M6 terminal studs. (See Figure 7-12.) This type of lug is not available from Cisco Systems; electrical-connector vendors, such as Panduit, provide this type of lug. Three power cables—4 AWG, 0.204-inch (5.18-mm) diameter, high strand count. The cable’s length is dependent on your router location. This cable is not available from Cisco Systems: it is available from any commercial cable vendor. Maintaining the Cisco 12012 7-25 Removing and Replacing a DC-Input Power Supply Figure 7-12 DC Power Cable Lug All measurements in inches 2.25 End View Ø .267 2 holes .55 4 AWG conductor .63 .37 .08 H10402 Crimp area .25 If you plan to upgrade your Cisco 12012 with a second DC-input power supply, you must remove the two power supply blanks covering the empty power supply bays before installing the power supply. Perform the following steps to install a new or replacement DC-input power supply: Step 1 Attach an ESD wrist strap to your wrist and to one of the two ESD connection sockets located on the front edges of the upper card cage or to bare metal on the frame. The DC-input power supply weighs 19 lb (8.3 kg). Use two hands when handling the power supply. Caution Step 2 Remove the replacement DC-input power supply from its shipping container. Step 3 Verify that the power switch on the replacement power supply is in the OFF (O) position. Step 4 Loosen the two screws that secure the DC-input power supply front cover in place. Lift up slightly then pull the front cover away from the power supply faceplate. Set the front cover aside. (See Figure 7-9.) Step 5 Remove the two screws that secure the source DC power cable bracket to the power supply faceplate and remove the bracket. 7-26 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Removing and Replacing a DC-Input Power Supply Before proceeding to the next step, verify that the source DC circuit breaker servicing the DC power supply you are replacing is in the OFF position. Also verify that the power switch on the DC-input power supply is OFF (O). As an additional check, measure the voltages across the DC power cable leads you intend to attach to the power supply. All readings should be zero volts. Caution Step 6 Thread the source DC power cable leads up underneath the power supply handle. Allow sufficient slack in the power cable for strain relief. Note The color coding of the source DC power cable leads to the DC-input power supply depends on the color coding of the site DC power source. Typically, green or green/yellow is used for ground. Since there is no color code standard for the DC wiring, you must ensure that the proper polarity is connected to the DC-input power supply. In some cases, the source DC cables might have a (+) or a (–) label. This is a relatively safe indication of the cable polarity. Warning When installing the unit, the ground connection must always be made first and disconnected last. Step 7 Remove the nut and locking washer from each power supply threaded terminal and attach the source DC power cable lugs to the power supply terminals in the following order: ground to ground, positive (+) to positive (+), and negative (–) to negative (–). (See Figure 7-11.) Step 8 Thread the power supply circuit breaker external alarm leads (if present) up through the power supply handle and attach them to the circuit breaker alarm terminal block on the power supply faceplate according to the notes you made in a previous step. (Some sites might not be equipped with a power supply circuit breaker external alarm.) Maintaining the Cisco 12012 7-27 Removing and Replacing a DC-Input Power Supply Step 9 Position the source DC power cable leads underneath the power supply handle on the power supply faceplate in the following order from left to right: negative (–), positive (+), and ground. Place the DC power cable bracket over the power cable leads and secure the cable leads and the cable bracket to the power supply faceplate with the two screws that you removed earlier. (See Figure 7-10.) Step 10 Verify that the source DC wiring from the source DC breaker to the power supply is correct and that the terminal connections on the power supply are correct and tight. Step 11 Place the power supply front cover so that the keyholes are positioned over the two standoff screws on the power supply faceplate. Slide the cover down slightly to engage the two screws and secure it in place by tightening the two screws. Step 12 If you plan to upgrade your Cisco 12012 with a second DC-input power supply, you must remove the two power supply blanks covering the empty power supply bays before installing the power supply. To remove a power supply blank, complete the following steps: (a) Loosen the captive screw on the power supply blank faceplate that secures the power supply blank to the card cage assembly. (b) Slide the power supply blank out of the front of the power supply bay. (c) Repeat steps (a) and (b) to remove the second power supply blank. Retain the two power supply blanks for possible future use. To prevent damaging the backplane power connector, do not use excessive force when sliding the power supply into the bay. Caution Step 13 Using two hands to support and guide the power supply, slide it into the vacant bay. (See Figure 7-13.) Push the power supply into the bay until the power supply captive jackscrew makes contact with the power supply bay. 7-28 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Removing and Replacing a DC-Input Power Supply Figure 7-13 Installing a DC-Input Power Supply H10612 DC-input power supply Use two hands to slide power supply into bay Maintaining the Cisco 12012 7-29 Removing and Replacing a DC-Input Power Supply Note To prevent connector alignment problems, apply even pressure to the power supply by pushing at the top of the power supply with one hand while you turn the captive jackscrew with the other hand. Step 14 Using a flat-blade screwdriver or a 10-mm nutdriver, turn the captive jackscrew on the power supply faceplate clockwise (insert) to seat the power supply into the backplane power connector. Do not overtighten the jackscrew. Note All electrical connections between the power supply and the backplane are made automatically when the power supply is fully inserted in the power supply bay. Checking the Replacement of a DC-Input Power Supply Visually check the following before turning the power supply power switch ON (|): • Each power supply is inserted all the way into its bay, and the captive jackscrew is tightened. • • Any unused power supply bays have power supply blanks installed. • At the DC power-source end of the power cable, the cable is securely attached to the source DC circuit breaker. • • The source DC voltage is within the range indicated on the power supply faceplate. All source DC power cables are securely attached to the power supply threaded terminals. When two supplies are installed, each power supply must be connected to a separate 60-amp DC service. Note To complete the installation, turn on the source DC circuit breaker servicing the DC-input power supply. 7-30 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Removing and Replacing a DC-Input Power Supply Perform the following steps to verify that the DC-input power supply powers up correctly. Step 1 Turn the power supply power switch to ON (|). Note Turning the power supply switch to ON (|) engages a latch that secures the power supply in the power supply bay. Step 2 Verify that the Cisco 12012 powers up correctly. Visually check that the DC-input power supply input OK LED goes on and stays on. Step 3 Visually check that the power supply output fail LED flashes on and off for five seconds, then goes off. • If the output fail LED remains on, suspect a power supply failure or an adverse environmental condition (the power supply has detected an overvoltage or overtemperature condition and has shut down). • If two power supplies are installed, and the output fail LED goes on only on one power supply, assume that the power supply or DC source (for that power supply) is faulty. • If the output fail LED goes on, on two power supplies that are connected to separate DC sources, assume that an overvoltage or overtemperature condition is causing the power supplies to fail. If the power supply fails to operate properly after several attempts to power it up, contact a service representative for assistance. Maintaining the Cisco 12012 7-31 Removing and Replacing a Blower Module Removing and Replacing a Blower Module The Cisco 12012 has two blower modules that provide cooling air to the card cage assembly. The blower modules slide into and out of the top and bottom of the frame and attach to the frame with two captive screws each. You need a replacement blower module (Product Number GSR12-BLOWER=) and the old blower module front cover to perform this procedure. Note Remove and replace the blower module according to the procedures in the sections “Removing the Blower Modules” and “Reinstalling the Blower Modules” in the chapter “Installing a Cisco 12012.” Then proceed to the following procedure to verify that the new blower module is operating properly. To verify that the replacement blower module is operating properly, perform the following steps: Step 1 Check that the blower module is inserted all the way into the frame, the two captive screws are tightened, and that the blower module front cover is securely installed on the front of the blower module. Step 2 Observe the green OK LED visible through the blower module front cover. The LED should come on as soon as the blower module is installed and power is applied to the system. Step 3 Observe the red fail LED visible through the blower module front cover: • • The LED should remain off indicating the three fans are operating normally. • If the red LED comes on and the blower module is completely installed in the frame, the replacement blower module might be faulty or the frame connector might be damaged. Exchange the top and bottom blower modules and see if the problem is with the blower module or with the frame connector. If the red LED comes on, check that the blower module is completely installed in the frame. Try reseating the blower module. If the blower module fails to operate properly, contact a service representative for assistance. 7-32 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Removing and Replacing the Card Cage Assembly Removing and Replacing the Card Cage Assembly This section covers the removal and replacement of the card cage assembly. Note The replacement card cage is shipped with only a new air filter installed; you must remove all other components from the old card cage assembly and install them in the replacement card cage assembly. The card cage assembly comprises a single assembly that includes the upper card cage, the lower card cage, and the power supply bays. The card cage assembly slides into and out of the frame and attaches to the frame with six captive screws. For ease of removal, all components, with the exception of the air filter, must be removed from the old card cage assembly. A fully populated card cage assembly weighs approximately 230 lb (104.3 kg); removing the components reduces the weight to 65 lb (29.5 kg). Note Where appropriate, you are referred to specific procedures in this chapter and to specific procedures in the chapter “Installing a Cisco 12012.” You need the following tools to perform this procedure: • • • • • • ESD wrist strap 1/4-inch flat-blade screwdriver 3/16-inch flat-blade screwdriver 10-mm nutdriver or wrench Antistatic card mat The card cage assembly (Product Number GSR12-CARDCAGE=) Maintaining the Cisco 12012 7-33 Removing and Replacing the Card Cage Assembly Powering Down the Cisco 12012 Perform the following steps to power down the Cisco 12012: Step 1 Turn the DC-input power supply power switch counterclockwise to the OFF (O) position (on an AC-input power supply, turn the power switch to STANDBY) on each power supply installed in the Cisco 12012. Step 2 Verify that the system has powered down by checking that the input OK LED on each DC-input power supply (AC OK LED on the AC-input power supply) is off and that the green LED on each blower module is off. Removing the Power Supplies If your system is configured with AC-input power supplies, remove each power supply according to the procedures in the section “Removing an AC-Input Power Supply” in this chapter. If your system is configured with DC-input power supplies, remove each power supply by performing Step 1 through Step 6 of the procedure in the section “Removing a DC-Input Power Supply” in this chapter. Removing the Cards from the Upper Card Cage This section provides the procedures for removing the line cards, RP, and alarm card from the upper card cage. Note You must remove any blank cards installed in the upper card cage and retain them for use in the replacement card cage. Blank cards must be installed in slots without cards to maintain proper air flow and for EMI considerations. 7-34 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Removing and Replacing the Card Cage Assembly Removing a Line Card from the Upper Card Cage Perform the following steps to remove a line card from the upper card cage: Step 1 Attach an ESD wrist strap to your wrist and to one of the two ESD connection sockets located on the front edges of the upper card cage or to bare metal on the frame. Step 2 Proceeding from left to right, identify each line card and write down the following information: • The line card slot number. When you install the line cards in the replacement card cage assembly, install them in the same card slots. • The interface cable connections to the line card ports. You must reconnect the interface cables to the same line card ports. Step 3 Proceeding from left to right in the upper card cage, select a line card. Starting with the bottom port on the line card (on line cards with multiple ports), disconnect the network interface cable from the bottom port on the line card. (See Figure 7-14a.) Step 4 Carefully remove the interface cable from the vertical cable-management bracket clips. (See Figure 7-14b.) Step 5 Carefully remove the interface cable from the vertical cable-management bracket clip nearest the line card port. (See Figure 7-14c.) Maintaining the Cisco 12012 7-35 Removing the Interface Cables from a Line Card Figure 7-14 0 R E IE KT TIV RR P AC CA RX 0 1 R E IE KT TIV RR P AC CA RX R E IE KT TIV RR P AC CA RX 0 1 2 1 2 3 R E IE KT TIV RR P AC CA RX R E IE KT TIV RR P AC CA RX R E IE KT TIV RR P AC CA RX 2 3 R E IE KT TIV RR P AC CA RX R E IE KT TIV RR P AC CA RX 3 R E IE KT TIV RR P AC CA RX 7-36 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide R E IE KT TIV RR P AC CA RX R E IE KT TIV RR P AC CA RX R E IE KT TIV RR P AC CA RX Line card cable-management bracket Interface cable Cable clip Cable clips H10880 Removing and Replacing the Card Cage Assembly Chassis cable-management tray a b c Removing and Replacing the Card Cage Assembly Step 6 Carefully remove the interface cable from the horizontal cable-management tray and set the interface cable aside. Note Repeat Step 3 through Step 6 for rest of the interface cables on that line card; then proceed to the next line card in the upper card cage. Continue the procedure until you have disconnected and removed all the line card interface cables from the cable-management system. Do not remove the vertical cable-management bracket from the line card. Step 7 Remove all the line cards according to the procedure in the section “Removing the Cards from the Upper Card Cage” in the chapter “Installing a Cisco 12012.” Removing a RP from the Upper Card Cage The RP must be installed in upper card cage slot 0. If you have two RPs in your Cisco 12012, the second RP must be installed in slot 11 (from left to right). The factory configuration has the RP installed in slot 0. Identify the slot the RP occupies, make a note of it, disconnect the interface cables, and remove the RP according to the procedures in the section “Removing the Cards from the Upper Card Cage” in the chapter “Installing a Cisco 12012.” After removing the RP, carefully place it on an antistatic mat. You must install the RP in the new card cage assembly. Removing an Alarm Card from the Upper Card Cage The alarm card occupies the rightmost slot (labeled Alarm card) in the upper card cage. Remove the alarm card according to the procedures in the section “Removing and Replacing an Alarm Card” in this chapter. After removing the alarm card, carefully place it on an antistatic mat. You must install the alarm card in the new card cage assembly. Maintaining the Cisco 12012 7-37 Removing and Replacing the Card Cage Assembly Removing the Cards from the Lower Card Cage Perform the following steps to remove the clock and scheduler cards and the switch fabric cards from the lower card cage. Note The lower card cage is located behind the air filter tray on the front of the card cage assembly. The clock and scheduler cards and switch fabric cards in the lower card cage are located behind an air deflector panel. To remove the clock and scheduler cards and the switch fabric cards in the lower card cage, you must first open the air filter tray, then position and latch the air deflector panel up, out of the way. Step 1 Remove all of the cards from the lower card cage according to the procedures in the section “Removing the Cards from the Lower Card Cage” in the chapter “Installing a Cisco 12012.” Step 2 Release the air deflector latch (turn the latch clockwise) and lower the air deflector down to its stops. Step 3 Pivot the air filter tray up so that it is flush with the front of the lower card cage and tighten the two captive screws. Removing the System Grounding Your system might have two system grounding lugs attached to two system receptacles located on the card cage assembly side flanges between the air filter tray and the power supply bays. You must remove the system grounding connector before you can remove the card cage assembly. Perform the following steps to remove a system grounding lug from the card cage assembly: Step 1 Remove the two screws, washers, and nuts that secure the system grounding lug to the card cage assembly. Save the mounting hardware, you will use it in a later procedure. Step 2 Remove the system grounding cable and set it aside. Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 for a second system grounding connector. 7-38 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Removing and Replacing the Card Cage Assembly Removing the Card Cage Assembly Remove the empty card cage assembly according to the procedures in the section “Removing the Card Cage Assembly” in the chapter “Installing a Cisco 12012.” An empty card cage assembly weighs 65 lb (29.5 kg). You need two people to safely lift the assembly. To prevent injury, keep your back straight and lift with your legs, not your back. Caution If you plan to return the old card cage assembly to the factory, repackage it in the shipping container you received with the replacement card cage assembly. Installing a New Card Cage Assembly The new card cage assembly is shipped with a new air filter. You must replace the components you removed from the old card cage assembly in the new card cage assembly. Install the replacement card cage assembly according to the procedures in the section “Reinstalling the Card Cage Assembly” in the chapter “Installing a Cisco 12012.” An empty card cage assembly weighs 65 lb (29.5 kg). You need two people to safely lift the assembly. To prevent injury, keep your back straight and lift with your legs, not your back. Caution Note Proceed to the following sections to replace all components in the new card cage assembly. Maintaining the Cisco 12012 7-39 Removing and Replacing the Card Cage Assembly Replacing the Cards in the Lower Card Cage The lower card cage slots are keyed and color coded; clock and scheduler cards are installed in the upper two slots (light blue labels), and the switch fabric cards are installed in the lower three slots (magenta labels). Install all of the cards from the lower card cage according to the procedures in the section “Removing and Replacing a Clock and Scheduler Card or Switch Fabric Card.” Replacing the Cards in the Upper Card Cage Install the alarm card, RP, and the line cards in the upper card cage according to the following procedures: • Install the alarm card according to the procedures in the section “Removing and Replacing an Alarm Card” in this chapter. • Install the RP according to the procedures in the section “Reinstalling the Cards in the Upper Card Cage,” in the chapter “Installing a Cisco 12012.” Install the RP interface cables according to the procedures in section “Connecting Route Processor Cables,” also in the chapter “Installing a Cisco 12012.” • Install the line cards according to the procedures in the section “Reinstalling the Cards in the Upper Card Cage,” in the chapter “Installing a Cisco 12012.” Install the line card interface cables according to the procedures in section “Connecting Line Card Cables,” also in the chapter “Installing a Cisco 12012.” 7-40 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Removing and Replacing the Card Cage Assembly Reattaching the System Grounding Your system might have two system grounding cable lugs. The system grounding receptacles are located on the card cage assembly side flanges between the air filter tray and the power supply bays. Perform the following steps to reattach the system grounding lugs to the card cage assembly: Step 1 Position the system grounding lug over the card cage assembly system grounding receptacle. Step 2 Secure the system grounding lug to the receptacle with two sets of screws, washers, and nuts. Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 for a second system grounding connection. Replacing the Power Supplies If your system is configured with AC-input power supplies, install the power supplies according to the procedures in the section “Installing a New or Replacement AC-Input Power Supply” in this chapter. If your system is configured with DC-input power supplies, install the power supplies according to the procedures in the section “Installing a New or Replacement DC-Input Power Supply” in this chapter. To maintain agency compliance requirements and meet EMI emissions standards in a Cisco 12012 system with fewer than four AC-input power supplies or only one DC-input power supply installed, power supply blanks must be installed in all empty power supply bays. Caution Maintaining the Cisco 12012 7-41 Removing and Replacing a Route Processor Removing and Replacing a Route Processor The RP (Product Number GRP= or PRP=) must be installed in upper card cage slot 0. If you have two RPs in your Cisco 12012, the second RP must be installed in slot 11 (from left to right). The factory configuration has the RP installed in slot 0. Note You must power down the Cisco 12012 when you remove and replace the RP. If you plan to replace the currently installed RP with a new RP, we recommend that you save the system configuration file, which currently resides in RP NVRAM, to a Flash memory card; otherwise, your system configuration file will be lost when you replace the RP. For instructions on copying configuration files to Flash memory, refer to the section “Copying System Configuration Files Between RP Memory and a Flash Memory Card,” in the chapter “Observing System Startup and Performing a Basic Configuration.” Disconnect any interface cables attached to the RP and remove the RP according to the procedures in the section “Removing the Cards from the Upper Card Cage” in the chapter “Installing a Cisco 12012.” Note Remove any Flash memory cards from the PCMCIA slots on the RP. Retain the cards for installation in the new RP. If you plan to return the old RP to the factory, repackage it in the shipping container you received with the replacement RP. Install the replacement RP according to the procedures in section “Replacing the Cards in the Upper Card Cage,” in the chapter “Installing a Cisco 12012.” Install the RP interface cables according to the procedures in the section “Connecting Route Processor Cables,” in the chapter “Installing a Cisco 12012.” 7-42 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Removing and Replacing an Alarm Card Removing and Replacing an Alarm Card The alarm card occupies the right-most slot in the upper card cage (labeled Alarm card). Unlike the RP and line cards, the alarm card can only be installed in this slot. The Cisco 12012 supports online insertion and removal of FRUs, which means you can remove and replace an alarm card while the Cisco 12012 remains powered up. You need the following tools and parts to perform this procedure: • • • • 1/4-inch flat-blade screwdriver antistatic mat ESD wrist strap The replacement alarm card (Product Number GSR12-ALRM=) Perform the following steps to remove an alarm card: Step 1 Attach an antistatic wrist strap to yourself and to one of the two ESD connection sockets located on the front edges of the upper card cage or to bare metal on the frame. Step 2 Disconnect any cables attached to the alarm card connectors. Step 3 Loosen the two captive screws at the top and bottom of the alarm card. (See Figure 7-15.) Note Unlike the line cards and RP, the alarm card does not have card ejector levers. The alarm card backplane connector is smaller, has fewer pins, and is easier to seat and unseat than the line cards and RP. Step 4 Using the screwdriver blade, gently pry at the top and bottom of the card to unseat the card from the backplane connector. Step 5 Grasp the card carrier edge with one hand and place your other hand under the carrier to support it (see Figure 7-15.) Slide the alarm card out of the card slot and place it immediately on the antistatic mat. Maintaining the Cisco 12012 7-43 Removing and Replacing an Alarm Card Figure 7-15 Removing an Alarm Card Loosen captive screws b Grasp card carrier to slide card out of slot 0 a R VE IE T TI RR PK AC CA RX 0 1 0 R VE IE T TI RR PK AC CA RX R VE IE T TI RR PK AC CA RX R VE IE T TI RR PK AC CA RX 2 R VE IE T TI RR PK AC CA RX R AL JOR NO IC IT MA MI CR 3 R VE IE T TI RR PK AC CA RX LT O/ AC ALARM 1 ALARM 2 OC-12/STM-4 POS Q OC-3/STM-POS OC-12/STM-4 ATM Upper card cage IL FA D LE AB EN 1 C CS 0 1 2 ALARM C SF H10906 0 Alarm card If you plan to return the old alarm card to the factory, repackage it in the shipping container you received with the replacement alarm card. Perform the following steps to install a replacement alarm card: Step 1 Attach an antistatic wrist strap to yourself and to one of the two ESD connection sockets located on the front edges of the upper card cage or to bare metal on the frame. Step 2 Grasp the alarm card faceplate with one hand and place your other hand under the card carrier to support and guide it into the card cage slot labeled Alarm card. Step 3 Carefully slide the alarm card carrier into the slot until it makes contact with the backplane connector, then stop. Avoid touching the card circuitry or any connectors. 7-44 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Removing and Replacing a Clock and Scheduler Card or Switch Fabric Card Step 4 Carefully push on the top and bottom of the alarm card to seat it in the backplane connector. Step 5 Tighten the two captive screws to secure the alarm card in the card slot. Step 6 Connect any external devices to their respective connectors on the alarm card. Removing and Replacing a Clock and Scheduler Card or Switch Fabric Card The Cisco 12012 supports a maximum of two clock and scheduler cards and three switch fabric cards in the lower card cage. You must power down the Cisco 12012 when you remove and replace a clock and scheduler card. The Cisco 12012 can remain powered up when you remove and replace a switch fabric card. The lower card cage is located directly behind the air filter tray and an air deflector. When you access the lower card cage, you must first lower the air filter tray, then raise and secure the air deflector. Remove a clock and scheduler card or a switch fabric card according to the procedures in the section “Removing the Cards from the Lower Card Cage” in the chapter “Installing a Cisco 12012.” Install a clock and scheduler card (Product Number GSR12-CSC=) or a switch fabric card (Product Number GSR12-SFC=) according to the procedures in the section “Replacing the Cards in the Lower Card Cage” in the chapter “Installing a Cisco 12012.” If you plan to return the old clock and scheduler card or switch fabric card to the factory, repackage it in the shipping container you received with the replacement card. Upgrading RP and Line Card Memory The Cisco 12000 Series Gigabit Switch Router Memory Replacement Instructions (78-4338-xx), which is available on-line and on the Cisco CDROM, contains the latest information about memory requirements and replacing memory on the Cisco 12000 series RPs and line cards. Refer to that document before replacing or adding memory to your RP or line card. Maintaining the Cisco 12012 7-45 Upgrading RP and Line Card Memory You can find the Cisco 12000 Series Gigabit Switch Router Memory replacement instructions at Cisco.com: http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/product/core/cis12012/bfrcfig/4338bmem.htm 7-46 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide A P P EN D I X A Repackaging the Cisco 12012 This chapter provides procedures for repackaging the Cisco 12012 should it become necessary to transport the system to another location or return it to Cisco Systems. (Where appropriate, you are referred to specific procedures in the chapter “Installing a Cisco 12012.”) Required packaging for the Cisco 12012 consists of the following items: • • • • • • • Shipping pallet Foam cap Wooden shipping container Large cardboard box Power supply foam inserts Accessories box Miscellaneous packing hardware Note Use Cisco-specified packaging when repackaging the Cisco 12012. You can order system packaging using Product Number PKG-GSR12=. Repackaging the Cisco 12012 A-1 Tools Required Tools Required You need the following tools and supplies to perform the repackaging procedure: • • • • • • • • • 1/4-inch flat-blade screwdriver 3/16-inch flat-blade screwdriver Pliers 10-mm nutdriver 9/16-inch wrench Wire cutters ESD wrist strap Antistatic mat Shipping tape Safety Recommendations Before you begin the procedures in this appendix, review the following safety information: • The safety recommendations listed in the section “Safety Recommendations” in the chapter “Preparing for Installation.” • The safety warnings listed in the document Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for the Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router (Document Number 78-4347-xx) that accompanied your Cisco 12012. A-2 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Removing the Cisco 12012 from a Rack Removing the Cisco 12012 from a Rack This section contains the procedures for removing the Cisco 12012 from a rack. Powering Down the Cisco 12012 Perform the following steps to power down the Cisco 12012: Step 1 Turn the power supply power switch counterclockwise to OFF (STANDBY on an AC-input power supply) on all power supplies installed in the Cisco 12012. Step 2 Verify that the system has powered down by checking that the input OK (or AC OK) LEDs on the power supplies are off and the green OK LEDs on both blower modules are off. Step 3 Turn off any circuit breakers to which the power supplies are connected, and disconnect all power cords or cables from the Cisco 12012 power supplies. Removing the Blower Modules The Cisco 12012 has two blower modules that provide cooling air to the card cage assembly. The blower modules slide on rails into and out of the top and bottom of the frame and attach to the frame with two captive screws each. Remove the blower modules according to the procedures in the section “Removing the Blower Modules” in the chapter “Installing a Cisco 12012.” Removing the Card Cage Assembly The card cage assembly comprises one assembly that includes the upper card cage, the lower card cage, and the power supply bays. The assembly slides into and out of the front of the frame and attaches to the frame with six captive screws. Note A fully populated card cage assembly weighs approximately 230 lb (104.3 kg). To make the card cage assembly easier to remove, first remove all components from the card cage assembly (see the appropriate sections in the chapter “Installing a Cisco 12012”). Repackaging the Cisco 12012 A-3 Removing the Cisco 12012 from a Rack Caution An empty card cage assembly weighs 65 lb (29.5 kg). You need two people to safely lift the assembly. To prevent injury, keep your back straight and lift with your legs, not your back. Remove the card cage assembly according to the procedures in the section “Removing the Card Cage Assembly,” in the chapter “Installing a Cisco 12012.” Removing the Frame from the Rack This section provides the procedures for removing the Cisco 12012 frame from the rack and for placing it on the shipping pallet. You need a 3/16-inch flat-blade screwdriver and a 9/16-inch wrench to perform this procedure. Perform the following steps to remove the frame from the rack: Step 1 Position the shipping pallet as close as possible to the rack where the Cisco 12012 is installed. Caution An empty frame weighs 75 lb (34 kg). You need two people to safely lift the frame. To prevent injury, keep your back straight and lift with your legs, not your back. Step 2 With one person positioned on each side of the frame, grasp the front and side of the frame. (See Figure A-1.) Step 3 Have a third person remove the eight screws that secure the frame to the rack. Place the eight screws in the accessories box. Step 4 Slide the frame out the front of the rack and place it on the shipping pallet. Orient the frame so that the front of the frame points toward the front of the pallet. Step 5 Install the four frame anchors through the slots in the bottom of the frame to secure the frame to the pallet. Tighten the four lag screws to prevent frame movement. Step 6 If a brace bar is installed in the rack, remove the two screws that secure it, then remove the brace bar from the rack. Place the brace bar and two screws in the accessories box. A-4 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Removing the Cisco 12012 from a Rack Removing the Frame from the Rack H10738 Figure A-1 Repackaging the Cisco 12012 A-5 Replacing Components in the Cisco 12012 Replacing Components in the Cisco 12012 This section contains the procedures to replace the components in the Cisco 12012 once it is on the shipping pallet. Replacing the Blower Modules The blower modules slide on rails into and out of the top and bottom of the frame and attach to the frame with two captive screws each. Replace the blower modules according to the procedures in the section “Reinstalling the Blower Modules,” in the chapter “Installing a Cisco 12012.” Replacing the Card Cage Assembly This section contains the procedures to replace the card cage assembly in the frame, the cards in the upper card cage, the cards in the lower card cage, and the DC-input power supplies in the power supply bay. If your system is configured with three or four AC-input power supplies, two AC-input power supplies are shipped installed in the power supply bay and the third and fourth AC-input power supplies are shipped removed from the system and packaged separately on the pallet. Replace the card cage assembly according to the procedures in the section “Reinstalling the Card Cage Assembly,” in the chapter “Installing a Cisco 12012.” Note Do not connect any power cords or cables to the power supplies or connect any interface cables to the line cards, RP, or alarm card. Caution An empty card cage assembly weighs 65 lb (29.5 kg). You need two people to safely lift the assembly. To prevent injury, keep your back straight and lift with your legs, not your back. A-6 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Completing the Repackaging Completing the Repackaging This section provides procedures for completing the Cisco 12012 repackaging. Included are procedures for positioning the large cardboard box on the pallet, repackaging the third and fourth AC-input power supplies in the large cardboard box, and repackaging the accessories box in the large cardboard box. If your system is configured with AC-input power supplies, proceed to the section “Repackaging the Redundant AC-Input Power Supplies,” for the procedure on repackaging the power supplies for shipment. If your system is configured with DC-input power supplies, perform the following steps: Step 1 Position the empty large cardboard box on the front of the pallet so that the two foam brackets mounted to the outside of the box are positioned under the system air filter tray. These foam brackets prevent the cardboard box from coming loose during transit. Step 2 Stack the bottom and top halves of the power supply foam inserts in the large cardboard box. Step 3 Proceed to the section “Repackaging the Accessories Box,” in this appendix, to complete the repackaging procedure. Repackaging the Redundant AC-Input Power Supplies Two AC-input power supplies are shipped installed in the Cisco 12012 power supply bay. If your system is configured with three or four AC-input power supplies, the third and fourth power supplies are shipped packaged in foam inserts inside a large cardboard box mounted to the front of the pallet. Perform the following steps to repackage the third and fourth AC-input power supplies in their shipping container: Step 1 Position the empty large cardboard box on the front of the pallet so that the two foam brackets mounted to the outside of the box are positioned under the system air filter tray. These foam brackets prevent the cardboard box from coming loose during transit. Step 2 Place the bottom half of the power supply foam insert in the bottom of the large cardboard box. Repackaging the Cisco 12012 A-7 Completing the Repackaging Step 3 Wrap the AC-input power supply in a plastic bag and place the packaged power supply faceplate-up in one of the cutouts in the bottom foam insert. Repeat this step for the fourth power supply. Step 4 Place the top half of the foam insert over the top of the power supplies. Repackaging the Accessories Box Perform the following steps to repackage the accessories box and place it in the large cardboard box (see Figure A-2): Step 1 Place all of the accessories (including brace bar, AC power cords, documentation, and mounting hardware) in the accessories box and tape the box shut. Step 2 Place the accessories box on top of the power supply foam insert. Step 3 Fold the flaps down and tape the top of the cardboard box. Step 4 Place the foam top cap on the top of the Cisco 12012. Installing the Side Panels, End Panels, and Top of the Shipping Container Perform the following steps to install the wooden side and end panels and the wooden top cap on the shipping container (See Figure A-2): Step 1 Install the two wooden side panels on the pallet by performing the following steps: (a) Position one of the shipping packaging wooden side panels on the pallet so that the four tabs on the bottom of the side panel are facing out and fit into the four slots on the edge of the pallet. (b) While holding the side panel, bend the four tabs outward 180 degrees with pliers or a flat-blade screwdriver. (c) Repeat steps (a) and (b) for the second side panel. A-8 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide Completing the Repackaging Figure A-2 Cisco 12012 Shipping Packaging Wooden top cap Foam top cap End panel Accessories box Side panel 0 SLOT-1 SLOT-0 RESET AUX PKT ACTIVE CARRIER RX EJECT 1 0 0 MII PKT ACTIVE CARRIER RX COLLRX RJ-45 MINOR MAJOR CRITICAL ACO/LT ALARM 1 OC-12/STM-4 POS OC-12/STM-4 ATM Q OC-3/STM-POS ROUTE PROCESSOR PUT AC OK PUT TX OUTFAIL LINK 3 AC OK PKT CARRIER RX ACTIVE OUTFAIL 2 CELL ACTIVE CARRIER RX CELL ACTIVE CARRIER RX CONSOLE PKT ACTIVE CARRIER RX Power supply foam inserts ALARM 2 FAIL ENABLED 0 1 0 CSC SFC 2 ALARM 1 Anchor INPUT: 200 10 -240V A 50/60 2000 HZ W ~ INPUT: 200 10 -240V A 50/60 2000 HZ W AC OK Pallet ~ OUTPUT FAIL AC OK OUTPUT FAIL Foam bracket Tabs End panel H10925 Large cardboard box Side panel Repackaging the Cisco 12012 A-9 Completing the Repackaging Step 2 Step 3 Install the two wooden end panels on the pallet by performing the following steps: (a) Position the shipping packaging wooden end panel on the pallet so that the two tabs on the bottom of the panel are facing out and fit into the two slots on the pallet. (b) While holding the end panel, bend the two tabs outward 180 degrees with pliers or a flat-blade screwdriver. (c) Repeat steps (a) and (b) for the front panel. Secure the four sides of the shipping container together by performing the following steps: (a) Grasp an end panel with one hand and a side panel with the other hand and fit the two panels together so that the six tabs on the end panel fit into the six slots on the side panel. (b) While holding the two panels, bend the six tabs outward 180 degrees to secure the two panels together. (c) Repeat steps (a) and (b) for the remaining three sides. Step 4 Position the wooden top cap over the top of the shipping container so that the twelve tabs on the sides of the shipping container fit into the twelve slots on the top cap. Step 5 Bend the 12 tabs outward 180 degrees with pliers or a flat-blade screwdriver. The Cisco 12012 is now repackaged and ready to be transported. Use a forklift or pallet jack to move the repackaged Cisco 12012. A-10 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide I N D E X Numerics 100BASE-T maximum cable lengths 3-47 specifications 3-47 transmission recommendations 3-47 A AC power cords 2-12, 2-13 frequency specification 2-12 input current specification 2-12 requirements 3-56 AC-input power supply checking replacement 7-17 description 1-29 electrical codes 2-3 installing (after frame installation) 3-54 to 3-56 LEDs 1-29, 7-18 packaging for shipment A-7 power cord types 2-12 removing (for replacement or card cage assembly replacement) 7-12 replacing 7-15 site requirements 3-53 upgrading for redundancy 7-15 UPS recommendation 3-56 agency approvals 1-42 air deflector description 3-10 location and use 3-12 air filter checking condition of 5-17 description and recommendations 1-37 maintenance 7-2 to 7-11 removing (for cleaning or replacement) 7-3 airflow cleaning filter 7-7 clearance around chassis 5-17 description 1-34 temperature sensors 1-36 alarm card audible alarm reset switch 1-24 connecting devices to 3-48 connector pinout 3-49 critical, major, and minor LEDs 1-24 description 1-23 LEDs switch fabric card status 1-24 system error display 1-24 removing and replacing 7-43 to 7-45 replacing 7-44 SELV requirements 1-24 site alarm connectors 1-24 alphanumeric LED displays at startup 4-3 to 4-5 description 1-11, 1-20 line card 5-13 RP 5-10 using for troubleshooting 5-4 altitude specifications, system 2-11 approvals, agency 1-42 asynchronous serial ports See auxiliary port and console port Asynchronous Transfer Mode See ATM ATM additional documentation 4-51 interface configuration 4-17 attaching cables alarm card 3-48 to 3-49 auxiliary and console port 3-33, 3-41 Ethernet port 3-36, 3-43 GRP 3-33 to 3-40 line cards 3-30 to 3-32 Index 1 power 3-53 to 3-64 PRP 3-40 to 3-47 system ground (after router installation) 3-50 to 3-52 auxiliary port connecting devices to 3-33, 3-42 description 1-12 GRP pinout 3-35 PRP pinout 3-42 B b command 4-5, 4-28 banner, system 4-6 blower module air circulation clearances 1-35 controller card 1-36 description 1-2, 1-34 fan failure 1-36 speed control 1-36, 5-16 front cover 1-34 LEDs 1-34, 1-36, 7-32 removing (for frame installation) 3-5 to 3-6 removing (for replacement) 7-32 replacing 7-32 replacing (after frame installation) 3-25 to 3-26 troubleshooting 5-16 boot bootflash command 4-8 boot command 4-26 boot slot0 (or slot1) command 4-8 boot system command 4-24, 4-26, 4-29 boot system flash command 4-26, 4-40, 4-44 booting system for first time 4-7 bootload-failure response 4-31 brace bar description and installation 3-3 Break key (interrupt) 4-30 broadcast address destination, configuration register settings 4-30 C cable-management system description 1-37 horizontal cable tray 1-37 recommendations 2-8 vertical cable bracket 1-37 cables 100BASE-T, maximum lengths 3-47 AC power 2-12 attaching to AC-input power supply 3-54 to 3-56 to alarm card 3-48 to 3-49 to console and auxiliary ports 3-33 to 3-35, 3-40 to 3-42 to DC-input power supply 3-57 to 3-64 to Ethernet port 3-36 to 3-40, 3-43 to 3-47 to line cards 3-30 to 3-32 to system ground (after frame installation) 3-50 to 3-52 DC power 2-14 distance limitations 2-16 interference 2-15 removing from vertical cable management bracket 7-35 safety guidelines 2-5 ungrounded and uninsulated 2-5 card cage assembly description 1-2 installing (after frame installation) 3-24 power supply bay 1-2 removing (for frame installation) 3-18 removing (for replacement) 7-33 to 7-38 replacement 7-39 to 7-41 replacing (after frame installation) 3-24 card handling safety 2-5 caution description xxii cd command 4-39 CD-ROM, ordering documentation 4-50 checking 2 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide configuration, system 4-21 connections 4-2 installation AC-input power supply 7-17 DC-input power supply 7-30 LED indications at startup 5-5 to 5-7 blower modules 5-16 power supplies 5-8 to 5-9 RP 5-10 to 5-14 shipping container contents 2-23 clearances, air circulation 1-35 CLNS, configuring 4-14 clock and scheduler card description 1-27 removing (for card cage replacement) 7-38 removing (for replacement) 7-45 status LEDs 1-28 clock, system 1-27 codes, electrical 2-3 color code for source DC cable 7-27 commands b 4-5, 4-28 boot 4-26 boot bootflash 4-8 boot slot0 (or slot1) 4-8 boot system 4-24, 4-26, 4-29 boot system flash 4-26, 4-41, 4-44 boot system flash filename 4-40 Break (interrupt) 4-30 cd 4-39 config terminal 4-20 config-register 4-27, 4-28, 4-33, 4-38, 4-41 configure 4-18 configure terminal 4-27, 4-28, 4-33 confreg 4-32 copy 4-42, 4-45 copy running-config startup-config 4-21 copy tftp 4-40 delete 4-39 diag 6-3, 6-5, 6-6, 6-9 diag halt 6-3 dir 4-7, 4-39 enable 4-20, 4-27, 4-33 EXEC command interpreter 4-7 Flash-related 4-38 format 4-37, 4-49 i (initialize) 4-33 interface 4-20 pwd 4-38 reload 4-28 setup 4-6, 4-8 show environment 5-8 show environment all 5-17 show environment table 5-17 show running-config 4-21 show startup-config 4-21, 4-31, 4-33 show version 4-19, 4-28, 4-32 squeeze 4-39, 4-40 config terminal command 4-20 config-register command 4-27, 4-28, 4-33, 4-38, 4-41 configuration file, saving 4-21 interfaces 4-15 to 4-19 register bit meanings 4-28 to 4-31 boot field 4-28 boot filename 4-29 broadcast address settings 4-30 changing settings 4-27 to 4-28 configuration 4-24 to 4-31 settings at startup 4-24, 4-26 transmission rate settings 4-30 samples 4-9 to 4-18 configure command 4-18 configure terminal command 4-27, 4-28, 4-33 configuring global parameters procedure 4-9 sample configuration 4-9 to 4-15 interfaces 4-15 to 4-18 system 4-8 to 4-21 Index 3 using configuration mode 4-20 confreg command 4-32 connecting AC-input power 3-55 alarm card cables 3-48 DC-input power 3-57 Ethernet port 3-37, 3-44 system ground 3-51 Connectionless Network Service See CLNS, configuring connections, checking 4-2 connector alarm card external alarm 3-48 auxiliary port 3-35, 3-42 console port 3-35, 3-42 Ethernet 3-37, 3-40 console port connecting devices to 3-33, 3-40 description 1-12, 1-22 pinout 3-35, 3-42 settings 3-34, 4-30 cooling subsystem components 5-15 environmental shutdown 5-17 troubleshooting 5-15 copy command 4-42 copy command (Flash memory) 4-45 copy running-config startup-config command copy tftp command 4-40 customer service, accessing 4-50 D data transmission-rate settings 4-30 DC power cable requirements 3-57 distribution, internal 1-32 requirements 2-3 specifications 1-41, 2-14 4-21 DC-input power supply cable lead color coding 3-60, 7-27 dimensions 1-30 electrical codes 2-3 external circuit breaker alarm terminal block 1-31 front cover removing 7-22 replacing 7-28 input voltages 1-31 installing (after frame installation) 3-57 to 3-64 LEDs 1-31, 7-31 power cable wire requirement 1-31 power switch 1-31 removing (for frame installation) 3-14, 3-16 removing (for replacement or card cage assembly replacement) 7-19 replacing 7-26 safety codes 2-3 securing with the jackscrew 1-31 site requirements 3-57 terminal lug requirements 3-57 terminal wiring requirements 3-57 upgrading for redundancy 7-19, 7-25 delete command 4-39 diag command 6-3, 6-5, 6-6, 6-9 diag halt command 6-3 diagnostic example failed test 6-9 with verbose option 6-7 without verbose option 6-6 diagnostics commands 6-3 description 6-1 parameters 6-3 running tests 6-5 sequence of tests 6-4 test results 6-6 to 6-10 DIMMs, description 1-6 dir command 4-7, 4-39 dispersion limit, multimode power 2-20 documentation 4 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide additional troubleshooting 5-17 CD-ROM, ordering 4-50 DRAM, GRP configurations 1-9 description 1-7, 1-9 dynamic random-access memory See DRAM and EDO DRAM, GRP E EDO DRAM, GRP 1-6, 1-9 electrical codes 2-3 safety guidelines 2-4 electromagnetic interference See EMI electromagnetic pulse See EMP prevention EMI approvals 1-42 prevention 2-15 EMP prevention 2-16 enable command 4-20, 4-27, 4-33 enabling passwords 4-8 environmental monitoring performed by MBus 1-40 using commands 5-17 specifications 1-41 Ethernet port configuration using setup facility 4-16 connecting devices to 3-36, 3-43 description 1-12, 1-22 LEDs 3-37 MII connector pinout 3-38 RJ-45 pinout 3-39, 3-45 examples cd command 4-39 config-register command 4-38 configuration Flash memory 4-34 to 4-49 interface 4-15 to 4-18 software configuration register 4-24 to 4-31 system 4-8 to 4-21 configuring global parameters 4-9 copying configuration files to NVRAM 4-49 images between Flash memory cards 4-44 images to a Flash memory card 4-42 delete command 4-39 dir command 4-39 dispersion limit, multimode power budget 2-20 formatting a Flash memory card 4-37 multimode power budget, line card 2-20 squeeze command 4-39, 4-40 EXEC command interpreter 4-7 extended data output See EDO DRAM, GRP F Fast Ethernet, specifications 3-47 filenames, for booting over the network 4-29 Flash boot ROM, PRP (table) 1-17 Flash memory additional commands 4-38 card related procedures 4-34 to 4-49 slot description 1-12, 1-21 copy command 4-45 copying between cards 4-44 copying bootable images between 4-44 copying files 4-42 copying files to RP memory 4-46 to 4-49 formatting a new PCMCIA card 4-37 GRP 1-10 installing a card 4-34 to 4-36 PRP 1-21 Index 5 removing a card 4-34 to 4-36 using 4-34 to 4-49 format command 4-37, 4-49 formatting a new Flash memory card 4-37 frame dimensions 1-2, 2-8 installing in a rack 3-20 to 3-23 mounting holes 3-20 removing from rack A-4 weight 1-2 G Gigabit Route Processor See GRP global parameters, configuring 4-9 GRP alphanumeric LED displays 1-11, 5-10 Cisco IOS software images 1-6, 1-9 description 1-5 DRAM configurations 1-9 description 1-6 Flash memory card installation and removal 4-36 descriptions 1-10 installing interface cables 3-33 to 3-39 LEDs 1-10 NVRAM 1-10 PCMCIA slots 1-12 soft reset switch 1-11 SRAM 1-9 H horizontal cable-management tray 1-37 humidity guidelines, system 2-11 I i (initialize) command 4-33 IEEE 802.3u specifications 3-47 IGRP, configuring 4-13 immunity approvals 1-42 information, obtaining additional 4-50 to 4-51 installing AC-input power supply (after frame installation) 3-54 to 3-56 AC-input power supply (as a replacement or for redundancy) 7-15 air filter 7-3 auxiliary port cable 3-35, 3-42 blower module (after frame installation) 3-25 brace bar 3-3, 3-4 card cage assembly (after frame installation) 3-24 cards in the lower card cage (after frame installation) 3-28, 3-29 in the upper card cage (after frame installation) 3-26, 3-27 DC-input power supply (after frame installation) 3-57 to 3-64 DC-input power supply (as a replacement or for redundancy) 7-25 Ethernet cables 3-37 Flash memory cards 4-34 to 4-36 frame 3-20 to 3-23 new card cage assembly 7-39 to 7-41 system grounding 3-51 system packaging A-8 tools required 2-22 unpacking the system 2-23 interface attaching cables 3-30 to 3-32 command 4-20 configuration 4-15 to 4-18 Ethernet (MII and MDI) 3-36 parameters, configuring 4-15 6 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide types used in system 3-30 interference, radio frequency 2-15 Interior Gateway Routing Protocol See IGRP, configuring interrupting system with Break key 4-30 removing (for replacement or card cage assembly replacement) 7-35 to 7-37 replacing 7-40 replacing (after frame installation) 3-26, 3-27 troubleshooting 5-12 link loss, line card 2-18 locked blocks, recovering from 4-49 L laser safety 2-6 LEDs AC-input power supply 1-29 alarm card 1-24 alphanumeric displays at startup 4-3 to 4-5 description 1-11, 1-20 line cards 4-4 RP 4-3, 4-4 blower module 1-36 clock and scheduler card status 1-28 DC-input power supply 1-31 GRP 1-10 lower card cage status 1-28 power supply 5-7 PRP 1-20 switch fabric card status 1-24 troubleshooting power supplies 5-7 lightning storm, safety during 2-5 line card alphanumeric display 5-12 attaching interface cables 3-30 attenuation and dispersion limits, fiber-optic link 2-18 boot-up alphanumeric messages 5-13 diagnostics 5-12 link loss 2-18 multimode and single-mode transmission 2-21 power budget 2-17 power margin 2-18 M maintenance bus See MBus MBus description 1-39 to 1-40 using for troubleshooting 5-4, 5-5, 5-7 MDI Ethernet port 3-36 RJ-45 cable connector 3-37 receptacle 3-39 media dependent interface See MDI media independent interface See MII memory components, PRP 1-17 memory devices, GRP 1-7 MII cable connector 3-37 description 1-12 Ethernet port 3-37 receptacle 3-38 multimode line card transmission 2-21 power budget example 2-20 N nonvolatile random-access memory Index 7 See NVRAM note, description of xxii NVRAM description 1-6, 1-7 GRP 1-10 PRP attribute summary (table) 1-17 description 1-19 saving settings 4-21 using with Flash memory 4-46, 4-49 O observing system startup 4-3 P packaging, system A-8 Packet-Over-SONET See POS passwords enabling 4-8 recovering 4-31 to 4-34 PCMCIA description, slot 1-12, 1-21 formatting a new Flash memory card 4-37 See also Flash memory Performance Route Processor See PRP Personal Computer Memory Card International Association See PCMCIA pinouts alarm card connectors 3-49 auxiliary port 3-35 console port 3-35, 3-42 Ethernet MII 3-38 RJ-45 3-39, 3-44 POS additional documentation 4-51 interface configuration 4-16 power distributed within system 1-32 margin for line cards 2-18 power cord safety 2-2 recommendations and requirements 2-11 to 2-14 site requirements AC-input power supply 3-56 DC-input power supply 3-57 specifications 1-41 AC-input 2-12 DC-input 2-14 surge suppression 2-16 ungrounded 2-4 power supply bay description 1-2 designations 3-54 descriptions 1-28 to 1-32 installation AC-input 3-54 blanks 3-58 DC-input 3-58 removing blanks 7-16 restrictions against mixing AC-input and DC-input power supplies 3-53 See also AC-input power supply and DC-input power supply privileged mode 4-7 procedures air filter maintenance 7-2 to 7-7 attaching cables 1FE 1-22, 3-43 alarm card 3-48 to 3-49 auxiliary and console port 3-33, 3-40 Ethernet port 3-37, 3-43 GRP 3-33 to 3-40 line cards 3-30 to 3-32 8 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide power 3-53 to 3-64 PRP 3-40 to 3-47 system ground (after router installation) 3-50 to 3-52 Flash memory copying files to 4-41 copying files to RP memory 4-46 to 4-49 enabling booting from 4-40 formatting cards 4-37 installing a card 4-34 to 4-36 making images bootable 4-38 removing a card 4-34 to 4-36 using 4-34 to 4-49 global parameters, configuring 4-9 to 4-15 installing AC-input power supply (after frame installation) 3-54 to 3-56 brace bar 3-3, 3-4 DC-input power supply (after frame installation) 3-57 to 3-64 line card interface cables 3-30 to 3-32 interfaces, configuring 4-15 to 4-19 recovering from a lost password 4-31 to 4-34 removing AC-input power supply (for replacement or card assembly replacement) 7-12 to 7-15 alarm card (for replacement) 7-43 blower module (for frame installation) 3-5 to 3-6 cards from card cage assembly (for frame installation) 3-7 to 3-14 clock and scheduler card (for replacement) 7-45 components, system (for frame installation) 3-4 to 3-19 DC-input power supply (for replacement or card cage assembly replacement) 7-19 to 7-25 frame A-4 RP (for replacement) 7-42 replacing AC-input power supply 7-15 to 7-17 alarm card 7-43 blower module (after frame installation) 3-25 to 3-26 clock and scheduler card 7-45 DC-input power supply 7-25 to 7-30 lower card cage cards (after frame installation) 3-28, 3-29 RP 7-42 upper card cage cards (after frame installation) 3-26, 3-27 system configuration, basic 4-8 to 4-21 startup 4-3 to 4-7 using configuration mode 4-20 processor CPU on the GRP 1-6 CPU on the PRP 1-15 RP, troubleshooting 5-10 subsystem, troubleshooting 5-9 to 5-15 PRP alphanumeric LED displays 1-20 Cisco IOS software images 1-15 Flash disk slots 1-21 Flash memory descriptions 1-21 LEDs 1-20 NVRAM 1-19 PCMCIA slots 1-21 SDRAM configurations 1-18 description 1-15 soft reset switch function 1-21 SRAM 1-19 publications, additional configuration 4-50 to 4-51 pwd command 4-38 Index 9 R rack-mounting frame 3-20 to 3-23 guidelines 2-7 related procedures 3-2 to 3-29 ventilation 3-2 radio frequency interference See RFI prevention recovering a lost password 4-31 reload command 4-28 removing alarm card (for replacement) 7-43 blower module (for frame installation) 3-5 to 3-6 blower module (for replacement) 7-32 card cage assembly (for frame installation) 3-18 to 3-19 card cage assembly (for replacement) 7-33 cards from card cage assembly (for frame installation) 3-7 to 3-14 clock and scheduler card 3-10 clock and scheduler card (for card cage replacement) 7-38 clock and scheduler card (for replacement) 7-45 Flash memory cards 4-34 to 4-36 line card (for frame installation) 3-8 line cards (for card cage replacement) 7-35 to 7-37 power supplies AC-input (for frame installation) 3-16 to 3-17 AC-input (for replacement or card cage assembly replacement) 7-12 to 7-15 DC-input (for frame installation) 3-14 to 3-16 DC-input (for replacement or card cage assembly replacement) 7-19 to 7-25 RP (for frame installation) 3-8 RP (for replacement) 7-42 switch fabric card (for card cage replacement) 7-38 switch fabric card (for frame installation) 3-10 to 3-13 switch fabric card (for replacement) 7-45 system grounding 7-38 replacing AC-input power supply 7-15 alarm card 7-43 blower module 7-32 cards in the lower card cage (after frame installation) 3-28, 3-29 cards in the upper card cage (after frame installation) 3-26, 3-27 clock and scheduler card 7-45 DC-input power supply 7-26 power supplies AC-input 7-15 to 7-17 DC-input 7-25 to 7-30 RP 7-42 system grounding (after card cage replacement) 7-41 reset switch on GRP 1-11 reset switch on PRP 1-21 RFI prevention 2-16 RJ-45 1FE, cable specifications 3-47 cable, specifications 3-47 connections 3-37, 3-43 description 1-12, 1-22 pinout, receptacle 3-39, 3-45 Route Processor See RP RP alphanumeric LED displays 4-3 power-on self-test 5-9 removing (for replacement) 7-42 replacing 3-26, 3-27 troubleshooting 5-9 10 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide S safety agency approvals 1-42 electrical 2-4 extra-low voltage requirements 2-3 general guidelines 2-2 lifting 2-3 system ground, missing 2-4 sample configuration 4-9 to 4-21 saving the configuration file 4-21 SDRAM, PRP attribute summary (table) 1-17 configurations 1-18 description 1-18 secret passwords, enabling 4-8 SELV requirements 1-25 serial ports, asynchronous See auxiliary port setup command 4-6, 4-8 shipping container contents, checking 2-23 show environment all command 5-17 show environment command 5-8 show environment table command 5-17 show running-config command 4-21 show startup-config command 4-21, 4-31, 4-33 show version command 4-19, 4-28, 4-32 Simple Network Management Protocol See SNMP, configuring single-mode line card transmission 2-21 power budget example 2-21 site requirements airflow 2-10 electrical safety guidelines 2-4 environment 2-11 ESD guidelines 2-5 plant wiring 2-15 power 2-11 to 2-14 rack mounting 2-7, 2-8, 2-9 safety guidelines 2-2 site log 2-24 SONET connections 2-16 system grounding 2-15 temperature and humidity 2-10 SNMP, configuring 4-14 soft reset (NMI) switch, PRP 1-21 soft reset switch, GRP 1-11 software configuration register functions 4-24 to 4-31 SONET connections 2-16 signal requirements 2-19 specifications acoustic noise 1-41 altitude 2-11 current 2-12 dimensions 1-40 environmental 1-41 Fast Ethernet (100BASE-T) 3-47 frequency, AC-input 2-12 IEEE 802.3u 3-47 physical 1-40 power 1-41 power, electrical input 1-41 temperature 2-11 thermal output 2-11 vibration 2-11 weight 1-40 squeeze command 4-39, 4-40 SRAM description 1-7 GRP 1-9 PRP 1-17 startup, system 4-3 to 4-7 static random-access memory See SRAM switch fabric bandwidth 1-27 card configurations and bandwidth 1-27 description 1-28 Index 11 removing (for card cage assembly replacement) 7-38 removing (for frame installation) 3-13 removing (for replacement) 7-45 status LEDs 1-28 clock and scheduler card description 1-27 removing (for replacement or card cage assembly replacement) 7-45 description 1-25 lower card cage slots 1-25 minimum system configuration 1-27 switches alarm card audible alarm reset 1-24 PRP soft reset (NMI) switch 1-21 soft reset 1-11 system banner 4-6 booting for first time 4-7 clock 1-27 configuration mode 4-20 configuration register configuration 4-24 to 4-31 settings at startup 4-26 configuration, basic 4-8 to 4-21 configuring global parameters 4-9 to 4-15 grounding cable connection 3-51 description 2-15, 3-50 reattachment (after card cage replacement) 7-41 removing 7-38 interfaces 3-30 lifting safely 2-3 packaging components A-1 installation A-8 replacement product number A-1 tools required A-2 power guidelines 2-11 specifications 1-41 privileged mode, EXEC 4-7 startup 4-3 to 4-7 startup preparation 4-2 unpacking 2-23 T telco-style rack requirements 2-7 telephone jacks 2-5 temperature sensors 1-36 specifications, system 2-11 thermal output, system 2-11 timesaver description xxii transmission recommendations, 100BASE-T troubleshooting additional references 5-17 checking the blower modules 5-7 cooling subsystem 5-15 damaged power cord 5-8 environmental shutdown 5-17 line card problems 5-12 power problems 5-4 processor subsystem 5-10 RP 5-10 startup problems 5-4 twisted-pair wiring 2-16 U uninterruptible power source See UPS unpacking, system 2-23 upgrading for redundancy AC-input power 7-15 DC-input power 7-19, 7-25 12 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide 3-47 UPS 1-30, 2-12, 3-56, 7-15 V ventilation clearance 3-2 vertical cable-management bracket 1-37 vibration specifications, system 2-11 voltage AC- and DC-input 1-41 AC-input power 2-12 adjustments made by MBus 1-40 DC-input power 2-14 W warning description (and translations) xxii wiring AC power 3-55 auxiliary and console port 3-33 to 3-35 DC power 3-57, 3-60, 3-61, 3-62 Ethernet port connections 3-36 to 3-39 interference 2-15 plant 2-15 system ground 3-50, 3-51, 3-52 telephone 2-5 Index 13 14 Cisco 12012 Gigabit Switch Router Installation and Configuration Guide